Mercedes Benz 2013 CLS Coupe Operator's Manual

CLS

Operator's Manual

Symbols

Registered trademarks:

R Bluetooth ® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.

R

DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

R

Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.

R BabySmart™, ESP ® and PRE-SAFE ® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.

R HomeLink ® is a registered trademark of

Prince.

R iPod ® and iTunes ® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

R Logic 7 ® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries.

R Microsoft ® and Windows media ® are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

R

SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM radio Inc.

R

HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.

R Gracenote ® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

R ZAGATSurvey ® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,

LLC.

In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols:

G WARNING

Warning notes draw your attention to hazards that endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i This symbol indicates useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol designates an instruction you must follow.

X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several steps.

( Y page) This symbol tells you where you can find further information on a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Display This font indicates a display message in the multifunction display/COMAND display.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright ©

The FreeType Project

2005 http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before you first drive off, read this Operator's

Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury.

Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may differ according to:

R model

R order

R country variant

R availability

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

R design

R equipment

R technical features

Therefore, descriptions may vary from those of your own vehicle.

The following are integral components of the vehicle:

R

Operator's Manual

R Maintenance Booklet

R

Equipment-dependent supplements

Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner.

The technical documentation team at

Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

A Daimler Company

2185841081

É2185841081TËÍ

Contents

3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 37

Opening/closing ................................. 73

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109

Climate control ................................. 123

Driving and parking .......................... 137

On-board computer and displays .... 207

Stowage and features ...................... 269

Maintenance and care ...................... 297

Breakdown assistance ..................... 311

Wheels and tires ............................... 325

Technical data ................................... 363

4

Index

1, 2, 3 ...

12 V socket see Sockets

4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic

Traction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel

drive) .................................................. 183

4MATIC off-road system ................... 183

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 229

Function/notes ................................ 64

Important safety notes .................... 64

Warning lamp ................................. 258

Activating/deactivating cooling

with air dehumidification ................. 128

Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 219

Display message ............................ 245

Function/information .................... 199

Active Driving Assistance package . 199

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 219

Display message ............................ 244


Active light function ......................... 115

Active multicontour seat .................. 100

Active Parking Assist

Display message ............................ 245

Important safety notes .................. 186

Active Service System see ASSYST PLUS

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 69

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 239

Function/notes ............................. 115

Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 369

Air bags

Display message ............................ 235

Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 42


Knee bag .......................................... 43

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 45

Pelvis air bag ................................... 44

Safety guidelines ............................. 40

Side impact air bag .......................... 43

Window curtain air bag .................... 45

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

AIR FLOW ........................................... 129

AIRMATIC

Display message ............................ 243

Function/notes ............................. 180

Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 134


Rear ............................................... 135

Setting ........................................... 133

Setting the center air vents ........... 134

Setting the side air vents ............... 134

Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lighting

Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Setting the color (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ................................................ 182

Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 279

Assistance menu (on-board

computer) .......................................... 217

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 302

Hiding a service message .............. 302

Notes ............................................. 302

Resetting the service interval display ........................................... 302

Index

5

Service message ............................ 302

Special service requirements ......... 302

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 71

Function ........................................... 71

Switching off the alarm .................... 71

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating ................. 218

Display message ............................ 242

Function/notes ............................. 191

Audio system see separate operating instructions

Authorized Centers see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshops see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 238 see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) .................................... 144

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) .......................... 143

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111

Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 150

Changing gear ............................... 149

DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 146

Display message ............................ 251

Drive program display .................... 147

Driving tips .................................... 149

Emergency running mode .............. 154

Engaging drive position .................. 148

Engaging neutral ............................ 148

Engaging park position (AMG vehicles) ........................................ 147

Engaging reverse gear ................... 147

Engaging the park position ............ 147

Kickdown ....................................... 149

Manual drive program .................... 152

Overview ........................................ 146

Problem (malfunction) ................... 154

Program selector button ................ 149

Pulling away ................................... 141

Selector lever ................................ 146

Shift ranges ................................... 151

Starting the engine ........................ 141

Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 150

Transmission position display ........ 146

Transmission position display

(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 147

Transmission positions .................. 148


emergency mode ............................... 154

B

Backup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 120

Bag hook ............................................ 275

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System

PLUS) .................................................... 65

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 77


Replacing ......................................... 77

Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 316

Display message ............................ 241


Jump starting ................................. 317

Blind Spot Assist


Display message ............................ 245

Notes/function .............................. 195 see Active Blind Spot Assist

Bottle holder ...................................... 277

Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 231

Notes ............................................. 369

Brake lamps

Display message ............................ 237

Brakes

ABS .................................................. 64

BAS .................................................. 64

BAS PLUS ........................................ 65

Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 369

Display message ............................ 229

Driving tips .................................... 162

High-performance brake system .... 163


6

Index

Maintenance .................................. 162

Parking brake ................................ 158

Warning lamp ................................. 257

Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away

Bulbs see Changing bulbs

C

California

Important notice for retail customers and lessees .................... 22

Calling up a malfunction

Car see Display messages see Vehicle

Care

Carpets .......................................... 309

Car wash ........................................ 303

Display ........................................... 307

Exterior lights ................................ 306

Gear or selector lever .................... 309

Interior ........................................... 307

Matte finish ................................... 305

Night View Assist Plus ................... 308

Notes ............................................. 303

Paint .............................................. 305

Plastic trim .................................... 308

Power washer ................................ 304

Rear view camera .......................... 307

Roof lining ...................................... 309

Seat belt ........................................ 309

Seat cover ..................................... 309

Sensors ......................................... 307

Steering wheel ............................... 309

Tail pipes ....................................... 307

Trim pieces .................................... 309

Washing by hand ........................... 304

Wheels ........................................... 306

Windows ........................................ 306

Wiper blades .................................. 306

Wooden trim .................................. 309

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 274

Car wash (care) ................................. 303

CD player/CD changer (on-board

computer) .......................................... 215

Center console

Lower section .................................. 33

Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 34

Upper section .................................. 32

Central locking

Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 222

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 75

Changing bulbs


Overview of bulb types .................. 119

Reversing lamps ............................ 120

Child-proof locks


Rear doors ....................................... 63

Children

In the vehicle ................................... 58

Restraint systems ............................ 58

Special seat belt retractor ............... 60

Child seat

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 61

Top Tether ....................................... 61

Cigarette lighter ................................ 280

Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 307

Climate control

Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 127

Controlling automatically ............... 129

Cooling with air dehumidification . . 128

Defrosting the windows ................. 132

Defrosting the windshield .............. 131

Dual-zone automatic climate control ........................................... 125


Indicator lamp ................................ 129

Information on using 3-zone automatic climate control .............. 128

Maximum cooling .......................... 131

Notes on using automatic climate control ........................................... 126

Overview of systems ...................... 124

Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 129

Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 132

Rear control panel ......................... 127

Index

7

Setting the air distribution ............. 130

Setting the airflow ......................... 131

Setting the air vents ...................... 133

Setting the climate mode (AIR

FLOW) ............................................ 129

Setting the temperature ................ 130

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 132

Switching on/off ........................... 128

Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133

Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 132

Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 131

Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 28 see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheel

Inflating ......................................... 359 see Emergency spare wheel

COMAND see separate operating instructions

COMAND display

Cleaning ......................................... 307

Combination switch .......................... 113

Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 295

Calling up ....................................... 294

Setting ........................................... 295

Consumption statistics (on-board

computer) .......................................... 212

Convenience closing feature .............. 88

Convenience opening feature ............ 88

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 300

Display message ............................ 239

Filling capacity ............................... 370


Temperature (on-board computer) . 224

Temperature gauge ........................ 209

Warning lamp ................................. 264

Cooling see Climate control

Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 236

Function/notes ............................. 114

Crash-responsive emergency

lighting ............................................... 118

Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 165

Cruise control lever ....................... 165

Deactivating ................................... 167

Display message ............................ 247

Driving system ............................... 165

Function/notes ............................. 165


Setting a speed .............................. 166

Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 166

Cup holder

Center console .............................. 276

Center console in the rear compartment ................................. 277


Rear compartment ......................... 277

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24

Customer Relations Department ....... 24

D

Dashboard see Instrument cluster

Dashboard lighting see Instrument cluster lighting

Data see Technical data

Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 238

Function/notes ............................. 111

Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Dealerships see Qualified specialist workshop

Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Interior lighting .............................. 222

Diagnostics connection ...................... 23

Digital speedometer ......................... 213

DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission

Display message

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 302

Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 228

Driving systems ............................. 242

8

Index

Engine ............................................ 239

General notes ................................ 228

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 228

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 254

Lights ............................................. 236

Safety systems .............................. 229

SmartKey ....................................... 253

Tires ............................................... 248

Vehicle ........................................... 251

Distance display (on-board

computer) .......................................... 217

Distance recorder see Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 266

DISTRONIC PLUS

Deactivating ................................... 176

Display message ............................ 246

Displays in the multifunction display ........................................... 175

Function/notes ............................. 167


Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 174

Warning lamp ................................. 266

Doors

Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 222

Automatic locking (switch) ............... 81

Central locking/unlocking

(SmartKey) ....................................... 75

Control panel ................................... 36

Display message ............................ 252

Emergency locking ........................... 82

Emergency unlocking ....................... 82


Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 160

Drinks holder see Cup holder

Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 150

Display ........................................... 146

Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 147

Manual ........................................... 152

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 225

Drive program selector ..................... 150

Driver's door see Doors

Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 303

Symmetrical low beam .................. 110

Driving on flooded roads .................. 164

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 69

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System

PLUS) ............................................... 65

Electronic brake force distribution ... 69

ESP ® (Electronic Stability

Program) .......................................... 66

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction

System) ........................................... 66

Important safety information ........... 63

Overview .......................................... 63

PRE-SAFE ® Brake ............................. 69

Driving systems

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 199

Active Driving Assistance package ......................................... 199

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 202

Active Parking Assist ..................... 186

AIRMATIC ...................................... 180

AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 182

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 195

Cruise control ................................ 165

Display message ............................ 242

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 167

HOLD function ............................... 178

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 197

Lane Tracking package .................. 195

Night View Assist Plus ................... 192

PARKTRONIC ................................. 183

RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 179

Rear view camera .......................... 189

Driving tips

AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 163

Automatic transmission ................. 149

Brakes ........................................... 162

Break-in period .............................. 138

Downhill gradient ........................... 162

Drinking and driving ....................... 160

Driving abroad ............................... 110

Index

9

Driving in winter ............................. 164

Driving on flooded roads ................ 164

Driving on wet roads ...................... 164

Exhaust check ............................... 160

Fuel ................................................ 159

General .......................................... 159

Hydroplaning ................................. 164

Icy road surfaces ........................... 164

Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ................................... 162

Pedals ............................................ 160

Snow chains .................................. 329

Symmetrical low beam .................. 110

Wet road surface ........................... 162

Drowsiness detection assistance system see ATTENTION ASSIST

DVD audio

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 215

DVD video

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 216

E

EASY-ENTRY feature


Function/notes ............................. 104

EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 105

Function/notes ............................. 104

Switching on/off ........................... 223

EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Display message ............................ 231

Function/notes ................................ 69

ECO display

Function/notes ............................. 160

On-board computer ....................... 213

ECO start/stop function

Deactivating/activating ................. 143

General information ....................... 142

Electronic Stability Program see ESP ® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS (Electronic

Traction System)

Emergency release

Driver's door .................................... 82

Fuel filler flap ................................. 155

Trunk ............................................... 86

Vehicle ............................................. 82

Emergency spare wheel


Points to remember ....................... 358

Removing ....................................... 358

Storage location ............................ 358

Stowing .......................................... 359

Technical data ............................... 361

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Function ........................................... 57


Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 21

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp ........... 264

Display message ............................ 239

ECO start/stop function ................ 142

Engine number ............................... 366

Irregular running ............................ 145

Jump-starting ................................. 317

Starting problems .......................... 145

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey ....................................... 141

Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 141

Switching off .................................. 158

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 321

Engine electronics


Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 300

Additives ........................................ 369

Checking the oil level ..................... 299

Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 299

Display message ............................ 241


Notes about oil grades ................... 368

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 299

Temperature (on-board computer) . 224

Viscosity ........................................ 369

10

Index

ESP ® (Electronic Stability

Program)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 225

Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 67

Deactivating/activating (except

AMG vehicles) ................................ 218

Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 67

Display message ............................ 229

ETS/4ETS ........................................ 66

Function/notes ................................ 66


Warning lamp ................................. 260

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction

System) ................................................ 66

Exhaust check ................................... 160

Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning

instructions) ...................................... 307

Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 110 see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ....................................... 105

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106

Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 106

Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 105

Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 223

Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 106

Setting ........................................... 105

Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ 107

Storing the parking position .......... 106

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 271

F

Filler cap see Fuel filler flap

First-aid kit ......................................... 312

Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 313

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 313

Floormat ............................................. 295

Fuel

Additives ........................................ 368

Consumption statistics .................. 212

Displaying the current consumption .................................. 213

Displaying the range ...................... 213

Driving tips .................................... 159

Fuel gauge ............................... 29, 209

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 367


Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 367


Refueling ........................................ 154

Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 367

Fuel filler flap

Emergency release ........................ 155

Opening/closing ............................ 155

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 213

Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 367


Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool

kit) ...................................................... 312

Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 322

Before changing ............................. 322

Fuse box in the engine compartment ................................. 322

Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 323


G

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 294


Opening/closing the garage door .. 294

Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 292

Gear indicator (on-board

computer) .......................................... 224

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 364

Glove box ........................................... 271

H

Handbrake see Parking brake

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 114

Index

11

Head bags

Display message ............................ 233

Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 301

Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 371

Cleaning system (function) ............ 114

Cleaning system (notes) ................ 370

Fogging up ..................................... 117 see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 99

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99

Adjusting (rear) ................................ 99

Installing/removing (rear) .............. 100

Luxury .............................................. 99

Heating see Climate control

High-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 237

Switching Adaptive Highbeam

Assist on/off ................................. 116

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Hill start assist .................................. 142

HOLD function

Display message ............................ 243

Function/notes ............................. 178

Hood

Closing ........................................... 299

Display message ............................ 252

Opening ......................................... 298

Hydroplaning ..................................... 164

I

Ignition lock see Key positions

Immobilizer .......................................... 71

Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument cluster

Overview .................................. 29, 209

Settings ......................................... 220

Warning and indicator lamps ....................................... 30, 255

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 220

Interior lighting ................................. 117

Automatic control .......................... 118

Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 222

Emergency lighting ........................ 118

Manual control ............................... 118

Overview ........................................ 117

Reading lamp ................................. 117

Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) ...................................... 220

Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ......... 221

J

Jack

Storage location ............................ 312

Using ............................................. 350

Jump-start (engine) see Jump starting (engine)

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 317

K

KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 88

Display message ............................ 254

Locking ............................................ 75

Start/Stop button .......................... 139


Unlocking ......................................... 75

Key positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 139

SmartKey ....................................... 139

Kickdown

Driving tips .................................... 149

Manual drive program .................... 152

Knee bag .............................................. 43

L

Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane detection (automatic) see Lane Keeping Assist

12

Index

Lane Keeping Assist


Display message ............................ 244


Lane Tracking package ..................... 195

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 225

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

anchors ................................................ 61

Light function, active

Display message ............................ 238

Lights

Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off . 222

Active light function ....................... 115

Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111

Cornering light function ................. 114

Driving abroad ............................... 110

Hazard warning lamps ................... 114

High beam flasher .......................... 114

High-beam headlamps ................... 113

Light switch ................................... 110

Low-beam headlamps .................... 112

Parking lamps ................................ 112

Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) ...................................... 220

Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ......... 221

Standing lamps .............................. 112

Switching Adaptive Highbeam

Assist on/off ................................. 221

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 221

Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 221

Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 221

Turn signals ................................... 113 see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting

Light sensor (display message) ....... 238

Loading guidelines ............................ 270

Locking see Central locking

Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 81

Emergency locking ........................... 82

From inside (central locking button) ............................................. 81

Locking centrally see Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-

board computer) ............................... 222

Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 236

Setting for driving abroad

(symmetrical) ................................. 110

Switching on/off ........................... 112

Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .......................................... 101

Luxury head restraints ....................... 99

M

M+S tires ............................................ 328

Malfunction message see Display messages

Massage function (PULSE) ............... 101

Matte finish (cleaning

instructions) ...................................... 305 mbrace

Call priority .................................... 286

Display message ............................ 232

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 287

Downloading routes ....................... 290

Emergency call .............................. 284

Geo fencing ................................... 290


Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 289

MB info call button ........................ 286

Remote vehicle locking .................. 288

Roadside Assistance button .......... 285

Search & Send ............................... 287

Self-test ......................................... 283

Speed alert .................................... 290

System .......................................... 283

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 291

Index

13

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis ....................................... 289

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 288

Mechanical key

Function/notes ................................ 76

Locking vehicle ................................ 82

Unlocking the driver's door .............. 82

Memory card (audio) ......................... 215

Memory function ............................... 107

Message memory (on-board

computer) .......................................... 228

Messages see Display messages

Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 216

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) ........................................... 76

MOExtended tires .............................. 313

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 352

Mounting a new wheel ................... 351

Raising the vehicle ......................... 350

Removing a wheel .......................... 351

Securing the vehicle against rolling away ................................... 349

MP3

Operation ....................................... 215 see separate operating instructions

Multifunction display

Function/notes ............................. 211

Permanent display ......................... 220

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer . 210

Overview .......................................... 31

N

Navigation


NECK-PRO head restraints

Operation ......................................... 51

Resetting after being triggered ........ 51

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Operation ......................................... 51

Resetting after being triggered ........ 52

Night View Assist Plus


Cleaning ......................................... 308

Function/notes ............................. 192


Notes on breaking-in a new

vehicle ................................................ 138

O

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 50

Operation ......................................... 45

System self-test ............................... 48

Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 58


OCS

Faults ............................................... 50

Operation ......................................... 45

System self-test ............................... 48

Odometer see Trip odometer

Oil see Engine oil

On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 224

Assistance menu ........................... 217

Audio menu ................................... 215

Convenience submenu .................. 223

Displaying a service message ........ 302

Display messages .......................... 228

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 175

Factory settings submenu ............. 224


Instrument cluster submenu .......... 220

Lighting submenu .......................... 220

Menu overview .............................. 212

Message memory .......................... 228

Navigation menu ............................ 214

Operation ....................................... 210

RACETIMER ................................... 225

Service menu ................................. 219

Settings menu ............................... 219

Standard display ............................ 212

Telephone menu ............................ 216

Trip menu ...................................... 212

14

Index

Vehicle submenu ........................... 222

Video DVD operation ..................... 216

Operating system see On-board computer

Outside temperature display ........... 210

Overhead control panel ...................... 35

Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 63

P

Paint code number ............................ 365

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 305

Panic alarm .......................................... 38

Parking ............................................... 157


Parking brake ................................ 158

Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 106

Rear view camera .......................... 189 see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

Active Parking Assist ..................... 186 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking brake

Display message ............................ 231

Notes/function .............................. 158

Warning lamp ................................. 263

Parking lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 112

PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 185

Driving system ............................... 183

Function/notes ............................. 183



Range of the sensors ..................... 184

Warning display ............................. 185

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp ...................................................... 45

Pedals ................................................. 160

Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 308

Power washers .................................. 304

Power windows see Side windows

PRE-SAFE ® protection)

(anticipatory occupant

Display message ............................ 232

Operation ......................................... 52

PRE-SAFE ® Brake


Display message ............................ 232

Function/notes ................................ 69

Warning lamp ................................. 266

Preventive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE ® (anticipatory occupant protection)

Product information ............................ 21

Program selector button .................. 149

Pulling away (automatic

transmission) ..................................... 141

Q

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24

R

RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 179

RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 225

Radar sensor system


Display message ............................ 243

Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 215 see separate operating instructions

Reading lamp ..................................... 117

Rear axle level control (AMG adaptive sport suspension

system) .............................................. 182

Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 135

Rear seat

Display message ............................ 252

Rear seat (folding the backrest

forwards/back) ................................. 273

Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 307

Function/notes ............................. 189

Switching on/off ........................... 190

Rear-view mirror

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106

Index

15

Rear window blind ............................ 278

Rear window defroster


Switching on/off ........................... 132

Refueling

Fuel gauge ............................... 29, 209


Refueling process .......................... 155 see Fuel

Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 291

Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 292

Reporting safety defects .................... 24

Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 242

Warning lamp ................................. 264 see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133

Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 146

Reversing lamps (display

message) ............................................ 238

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22

Roller sunblind

Rear window .................................. 278

Roof carrier ........................................ 275

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 309

Roof load (maximum) ........................ 371

S

Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 58

Child restraint systems .................... 58

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 45

Safety system see Driving safety systems

Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 56

Adjusting the height ......................... 56

Belt force limiters ............................ 57

Cleaning ......................................... 309

Correct usage .................................. 54

Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 57

Fastening ......................................... 55

Important safety guidelines ............. 53

Releasing ......................................... 56


Switching belt adjustment on/off

(on-board computer) ...................... 223

Warning lamp ................................. 256

Warning lamp (function) ................... 56

Seats

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .......................................... 101

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99

Cleaning the cover ......................... 309

Correct driver's seat position ........... 96


Seat backrest display message ..... 253

Seat heating problem .................... 102

Seat ventilation problem ................ 102


Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101

Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 102

Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 309

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 307

Service see ASSYST PLUS

Service menu (on-board computer) . 219

Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 369

Coolant (engine) ............................ 369

Engine oil ....................................... 368

Fuel ................................................ 366


Washer fluid ................................... 370

Service work see ASSYST PLUS

Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 224

On-board computer ....................... 219

Setting the air distribution ............... 130

Setting the airflow ............................ 131

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 225

16

Index

Side impact air bag ............................. 43

Side marker lamp (display

message) ............................................ 238

Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 306


Convenience opening feature .......... 88


Opening/closing .............................. 87

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90

Resetting ......................................... 89

Sliding sunroof


Opening/closing .............................. 91


Resetting ......................................... 91

SmartKey

Changing the battery ....................... 77

Changing the programming ............. 76

Checking the battery ....................... 77


Convenience opening feature .......... 88

Display message ............................ 253

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 75


Loss ................................................. 79

Mechanical key ................................ 76

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 139



Snow chains ...................................... 329

Sockets

Center console .............................. 282

General notes ................................ 281

Rear compartment ......................... 282

Trunk ............................................. 282

Under the armrest ......................... 281

Spare wheel

Stowing .......................................... 359

Specialist workshop ............................ 24

Special seat belt retractor .................. 60

Speed, controlling see Cruise control

Speedometer

Digital ............................................ 213

In the Instrument cluster ......... 29, 209

Segments ...................................... 210

Selecting the unit of measurement ................................ 220 see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling mode

Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 67

Warning lamp ................................. 261

SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Display message ............................ 233

Introduction ..................................... 39

Warning lamp ................................. 263

Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

Standing lamps

Display message ............................ 237

Switching on/off ........................... 112

Starting (engine) ................................ 141

Steering (display message) .............. 253

Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 103

Button overview ............................... 31

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 210

Cleaning ......................................... 309


Paddle shifters ............................... 150

Steering wheel heating .................. 103


Steering wheel heating


Switching on/off ........................... 103

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 150

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 225

Stowage areas ................................... 270

Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 272

Center console .............................. 271

Cup holders ................................... 276

Eyeglasses compartment ............... 271

Glove box ....................................... 271

Important safety information ......... 270

Rear ............................................... 272

Stowage net ................................... 273

Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 272

Stowage net ....................................... 273

Index

17

Stowage space

Center console (rear) ..................... 272

Stowage well beneath the trunk

floor .................................................... 275

Summer tires ..................................... 328

Sun visor ............................................ 278

Supplement Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Surround lighting (on-board

computer) .......................................... 221

Suspension tuning

AIRMATIC ...................................... 181

AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 182

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 225

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ................................................. 132

Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 71

T

Tachometer ........................................ 209

Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 237

Tank content

Fuel gauge ............................... 29, 209

Technical data

Emergency spare wheel ................. 361

Information .................................... 364

Tires/wheels ................................. 353

Vehicle data ................................... 371

TELEAID

Call priority .................................... 286

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 287

Downloading routes ....................... 290

Emergency call .............................. 284

Geo fencing ................................... 290


Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 289

MB info call button ........................ 286

Remote vehicle locking .................. 288

Roadside Assistance button .......... 285

Search & Send ............................... 287

Self-test ......................................... 283

Speed alert .................................... 290

System .......................................... 283

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 291

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis ....................................... 289

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 288

Telephone

Accepting a call ............................. 216

Display message ............................ 253


Number from the phone book ........ 217

Redialing ........................................ 217

Rejecting/ending a call ................. 216

Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 209

Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 224

Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 224

Outside temperature ...................... 210

Setting (climate control) ................ 130

Theft deterrent systems

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 71

Immobilizer ...................................... 71

Through-loading feature ................... 273

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 225

Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 334

Checking manually ........................ 333

Display message ............................ 248

Maximum ....................................... 332

Notes ............................................. 331

Recommended ............................... 329

Tire pressure loss warning system


Restarting ...................................... 333

Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure electronically ................................. 336

Warning message .......................... 336

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function/notes ............................. 334

Restarting ...................................... 336

Warning lamp ................................. 267

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 347

Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 346

Bar (definition) ............................... 345

Changing a wheel .......................... 348

Characteristics .............................. 345

Checking ........................................ 327

18

Index

Definition of terms ......................... 345

Direction of rotation ...................... 348

Display message ............................ 248

Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 348

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................... 345

DOT (Department of

Transportation) (definition) ............ 346

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(definition) ..................................... 346

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

(definition) ..................................... 346

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating) (definition) ......................... 346


Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... 346

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 346

Labeling (overview) ........................ 342

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 347

Load index ..................................... 344

Load index (definition) ................... 346

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(definition) ..................................... 346

Maximum load on a tire

(definition) ..................................... 347

Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ....................... 347

Maximum tire load ......................... 344

Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 347

MOExtended tires .......................... 328

Optional equipment weight

(definition) ..................................... 347

PSI (pounds per square inch)

(definition) ..................................... 347

Replacing ....................................... 348

Service life ..................................... 328

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 347

Speed rating (definition) ................ 346

Storing ........................................... 348

Structure and characteristics

(definition) ..................................... 345

Temperature .................................. 341

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

(definition) ..................................... 347

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 347

Tire pressure (definition) ................ 347

Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 346

Tire size (data) ............................... 353

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 342

Tire tread ....................................... 327

Tire tread (definition) ..................... 347

Total load limit (definition) ............. 348

Traction ......................................... 341

Traction (definition) ....................... 347

Tread wear ..................................... 341

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards ...................................... 340

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards (definition) .................... 346

Unladen weight (definition) ............ 347

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 347

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 346 see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 61

Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 318

Installing the towing eye ................ 319

Removing the towing eye ............... 320

With the rear axle raised ................ 320

Towing away

With both axles on the ground ....... 320

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 321


Transmission see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 147

Transmission position display

(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 147

Transporting the vehicle .................. 321

Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 309

Trip computer (on-board

computer) .......................................... 212

Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 212

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 213

Trunk

Emergency release .......................... 86


Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 85

Index

19

Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 84

Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 83

Trunk lid

Display message ............................ 252

Opening/closing .............................. 82

Opening dimensions ...................... 371

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 371

Turn signals

Display message ............................ 236

Switching on/off ........................... 113

Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate

U

Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 82

From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 81

V

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 278

Vehicle

Data acquisition ............................... 25

Display message ............................ 251

Equipment ....................................... 21

Individual settings .......................... 219

Limited Warranty ............................. 25

Loading .......................................... 337

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 82

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 75

Lowering ........................................ 352

Maintenance .................................... 22

Parking for a long period ................ 159

Pulling away ................................... 141

Raising ........................................... 350

Reporting problems ......................... 24

Securing from rolling away ............ 349

Towing away .................................. 318

Transporting .................................. 321

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 82

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 75

Vehicle data ................................... 371

Vehicle data ....................................... 371

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 371

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 82

Vehicle identification number see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 365

Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 180

Vehicle level (display message) ....... 243

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 312

Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 216

VIN ...................................................... 365

W

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 258

Brakes ........................................... 257

Check Engine ................................. 264

Coolant .......................................... 264

Distance warning ........................... 266

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 266

ESP ® .............................................. 260

ESP ® OFF ....................................... 261

Fuel tank ........................................ 264

Overview .................................. 30, 255

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 45

Reserve fuel ................................... 264

Seat belt ........................................ 256

SPORT handling mode ................... 261

SRS ................................................ 263

Tire pressure monitor .................... 267

Warranty ............................................ 364

Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 253

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 352

Wheel chock ...................................... 349

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 348

Checking ........................................ 327

Cleaning ......................................... 306

Cleaning (warning) ......................... 348

Emergency spare wheel ................. 357


Interchanging/changing ................ 348

Mounting a new wheel ................... 351

Mounting a wheel .......................... 349

Removing a wheel .......................... 351

20

Index

Storing ........................................... 348

Tightening torque ........................... 352

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 353

Window curtain air bag

Operation ......................................... 45

Windows see Side windows

Windshield

Defrosting ...................................... 131

Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 301


Notes ............................................. 370

Windshield wipers


Replacing the wiper blades ............ 121

Switching on/off ........................... 120

Winter driving


Slippery road surfaces ................... 164

Snow chains .................................. 329

Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 328

Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 306


Replacing ....................................... 121

Wooden trim (cleaning

instructions) ...................................... 309

Workshops see Qualified specialist workshop

Introduction

21

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore,

Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This is also the case, even if they have been independently or officially approved. The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved conversion parts and accessories are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center. Here, you will receive advice about permissible technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally installed.

Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Vehicle equipment

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described.

This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from some of the descriptions or illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have any questions about equipment or operation.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance

Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Printed Operator's Manual

The printed Operator's Manual (including any

Supplements) must be observed.

There is no electronic update to the Digital

Operator's Manual. Amendments are only made to the printed Operator's Manual.

Operator's Manual

General notes

Before you first drive off, read this Operator's

Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle.

For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literature

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and

Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:

R New Vehicle Limited Warranty

R

Emission Systems Warranty

R Emission Performance Warranty

R

California, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Rhode Island and Vermont Emission

Control Systems Warranty

R

State warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)

22

Introduction

Information for customers in

California

In California, you have the right to exchange a vehicle or receive a refund of the purchase or leasing price if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or an authorized workshop or maintenance facility cannot, after several authorized repairs, rectify considerable damage to or malfunctions of the vehicle that are covered by the contractual warranty.

During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

(1) the serious defect or damage can result in deadly or serious injury to the vehicle occupants while driving AND this defect has already been repaired at least twice

AND Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair.

(2) the defect or damage, though less serious than (1) above, has already been repaired at least four times AND

Mercedes-Benz has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than 30 calendar days because of repair work resulting from this or other serious defects or damage.

Please send your written notice to:


Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance

The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals.

Always have the Service and Warranty

Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside

Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)

(USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

For additional information, refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside

Assistance" section in the Service and

Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service Center (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center (USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or

Introduction

23

Customer Service (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100.

qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING

Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle's electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components.

Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.

G WARNING

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

Such blows can be caused, for example, by running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole.

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred:

R turn on your hazard warning flashers.

R slow down carefully.

R drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection

G WARNING

If you connect equipment to the on-board diagnostics connection, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This can impair the operating safety of your vehicle while driving. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not connect any equipment to the onboard diagnostics connection.

G WARNING

Loose equipment or equipment cables which are connected to the on-board diagnostics connection can obstruct the area around the pedals. The equipment or the cables could come between the pedals in the event of

Z

24

Introduction sudden braking or acceleration. This may affect the function of the pedals. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any equipment or cables in the driver's footwell.

! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can, for example, lead to emissions monitoring information being reset. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection.

and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses.

In the USA

Customer Assistance Center


One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Customer Relations Department

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.

Observe the notes in the Maintenance

Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:

R work relevant to safety

R service and maintenance work

R repair work

R alterations, installation work and modifications

R work on electronic components

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed

Reporting safety defects

USA only:

The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers according to Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor

Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,

Washington, DC 20590.

Introduction

25

You can obtain additional information about vehicle safety from: http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty

! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage.

Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the

New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle

(Including notice pursuant to California Code

§ 9951)

Your vehicle records electronic data. If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:

TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of an accident.

This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety.

Daimler AG can access this data and submit it:

R for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes

R with the consent of the vehicle owner

R on the instruction of prosecuting authorities

R for use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales and service organizations

R as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE

AID) purchase agreement to find out more about data that can be recorded and transmitted by this system.

Information on copyright

Registered trademarks

Registered trademarks:

R Bluetooth ® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.

R

DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

R

Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.

R BabySmart™, ESP ® and PRE-SAFE ® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.

R HomeLink ®

Prince.

is a registered trademark of

R iPod ® and iTunes ® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

R Logic7 ® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries.

R Microsoft ® and Windows media ® are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

R

SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM radio Inc.

R

HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.

R Gracenote ® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

R ZAGATSurvey ® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,

LLC.

FreeType

Portions of this software are copyright © 2005

The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. © 1996-2000 by David

Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg.

Gnu compiler

Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the

University of California. All rights reserved.

The Berkeley software License Agreement specifies the terms and conditions for

Z

26

Introduction redistribution. Redistributions and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistribution of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE

REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND

ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN

NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Cockpit ................................................. 28

Instrument cluster .............................. 29

Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31

Center console .................................... 32

Overhead control panel ...................... 35

Door control panel .............................. 36

27

28

Cockpit

Cockpit

Function

: Steering wheel paddle shifters

; Cruise control lever

= Instrument cluster

?

Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever

B PARKTRONIC warning display

C Overhead control panel

D Climate control systems

E Ignition lock

Start/Stop button

Page

150

165

29

146

183

35

124

139

139

Function

F Adjusting the steering wheel

Steering wheel heating

G Combination switch

H Parking brake

I Diagnostics connection

J Opening the hood

Page

K Releasing the parking brake 158

L Light switch 110

M Night View Assist Plus 192

103

103

113

158

23

298


Displays


29

Function

: Speedometer with segments

; Multifunction display

= Tachometer

Page i Adjust the instrument cluster lighting using the on-board computer

( Y page 220).

210

211

209

Function

?

Coolant temperature

A Fuel gauge

Page

209

30


Warning and indicator lamps

Function

: ÷ ESP ®

M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles

Page

260

; · Distance warning

= å ESP ® OFF

?

#! Turn signals

261

266

260

A $ Brakes (USA only)

113

257

B J Brakes (Canada only) 257

C ! ABS 258

D 6 SRS

E ; Check Engine

263

264

F h Tire pressure monitor 267

Function

G ü Seat belt

Page

256

H ÷ ESP ® in AMG vehicles 261

I ? Coolant 264

J K High-beam headlamp 113

K L Low-beam headlamps

L T Parking lamps

112

112

M R This lamp has no function

N N This lamp has no function

O 8 Reserve fuel 264



31

Function

: Multifunction display

; COMAND display; see the separate Operating

Instructions

= ?

Switches on the Voice

Control System; see the separate operating instructions

?

~

Rejects or ends a call

Exits phone book/redial memory

6

Makes or accepts a call

Switches to the redial memory

WX

Adjusts the volume

8

Mute

Page

211

216

Function

A =;

Selects a menu

9:

Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a

Confirms your selection

Hides display messages

B %

Back

Switches off the Voice


Page

210

210

210

228

210

32

Center console

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function

: COMAND; see the separate operating instructions

; c Seat heating

= s Seat ventilation

?

c PARKTRONIC

A ¤ ECO start/stop function (AMG vehicles)

Page

101

102

183

142

Function

B 45 Indicator lamp

C £ Hazard warning lamps

D u Roller sunblind in the rear window

Page

45

114

278

Center console, lower section

Center console

33

Function

E Stowage compartment

Ashtray

Cigarette lighter

Power socket

Cup holders

F Cup holders

G e Sets the suspension tuning

Page

270

279

280

281

276

276

181

Function Page

H É Sets the vehicle level 180

I Stowage compartment 270

J Ú Selects the drive program

K COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions

149

34

Center console

Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

Function

E Cup holders

F Engages parking position P 158

G Selector lever 146

H Ashtray

Cigarette lighter

Power socket

279

280

281

I COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions

Page

276

Function

J Stowage compartment

K ß Calls up/saves the suspension tuning

L à Sets the suspension tuning

M å ESP

®

N Drive program selector

Page

270

182

182

67

150

Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

35

Function

: u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off

= p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off

?

ï MB Info call button

(mbrace system)

A 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof

B G SOS button (mbrace system)

C Rear-view mirror

D Buttons for the garage door opener

Page

118

118

117

286

91

284

106

292

Function

E Integrated electronic compass

F Microphone for mbrace

(emergency call system), telephone and Voice


G F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system)

H p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off

I c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

Page

294

285

117

118

36

Door control panel

Door control panel

Function

: r45=

Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel

; Adjusts the seats electrically

= %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle

?

Opens the door

A 7Zö\

Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically

Page

107

98

81

81

105

Function

B W Opens/closes the side windows

C n Activates/ deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment

D p Opens/closes the trunk lid

Page

87

63

85

Useful information .............................. 38

Panic alarm .......................................... 38

Occupant safety .................................. 38

Children in the vehicle ........................ 58

Driving safety systems ....................... 63

Theft deterrent locking system ......... 71

37

38

Occupant safety

Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's

Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: ( Y page 24).

Panic alarm

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-Gen of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:





X To activate: press ! button : for at least one second.

An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.

X or

To deactivate: press ! button : again.

X or

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.

The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.

i USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

Occupant safety


G WARNING

Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint system components or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.

Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices

(ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not

Occupant safety

39 tamper with electronic components or their software.

In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle.

The restraint system consists of:

R seat belts

R child restraint systems

R LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

Additional protection is provided by:

R SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

R

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

R PRE-SAFE ®

R air bag system components with:

-

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

front-passenger seat with Occupant

Classification System (OCS)

The different air bag systems work independently of each other. The protective functions of the system work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.

i See "Children in the vehicle" for information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children

( Y page 58).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Introduction

SRS consists of:

R 6 SRS warning lamp

R

Air bags

R

Air bag control unit with crash sensors

R

Emergency Tensioning Devices

R

Belt force limiters

SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNING

The SRS self-check has detected a malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:

R does not light up at all

R does not go out after approximately four seconds after the engine is started

R lights up after the engine is started or while the vehicle is in motion

For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you have the system checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail to activate when it is needed in the event of an accident, which could lead to serious or fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could also result in injury.

In addition, work carried out improperly on

SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause unintended air bag deployment. Work on the

SRS system should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information, contact our Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.

The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started.

The SRS components are in operational readiness when the SRS 6 indicator lamp goes out while the engine is running.

Z

40

Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for seat belts,

Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags

G WARNING

R

Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

R

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/

Perchlorate/index.cfm.

R

Air bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-

SAFE ® has electrically operated reversible belt tensioners in addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs.

R Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.

R Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts.

R Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

R No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS.

R Do not change or remove any component or part of the SRS.

R Do not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc. to the:

padded steering wheel boss

-

-

-

-

knee bag covers front-passenger air bag cover outer side of front seat bolsters side trim next to the rear seat backrest roof lining trim

R Do not install additional electrical/ electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring.

R Keep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

R Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may be thrown around in the vehicle and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed.

R Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.

R Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

R Improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment.

Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

R For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or

ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

R Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Occupant safety

41

Air bags


G WARNING

Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:

R frontal impacts (driver's and frontpassenger front air bags and knee bags)

R side impacts (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)

R rollover (window curtain air bags)

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder is released. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

G WARNING

In order to reduce the potential danger of injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger must always be correctly seated and wear their seat belts.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is correctly positioned on your body.

As the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it inflates with great force instantaneously:

R sit with the seat belt fastened correctly and in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the backrest.

R move the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

R do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.

R only hold the steering wheel on the outside.

Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag inflates.

R adjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

R occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious or fatal injuries should the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

Z

42

Occupant safety

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this

Operator's Manual.

G WARNING

Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.

A side impact air bag related injury may occur if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible and use the seat belts properly.

Make sure that children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized child restraint, infant restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.

Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.

All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not.

It is important for your safety and that of your passengers to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

Front air bags

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up.

The air bags are deployed if the air bag control unit detects the need for deployment. Only in the event of such a situation will the air bags provide their supplemental protection.

If the driver and front passenger do not wear their seat belts, it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection.

In the event of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver and passengers will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box.

The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest.

They are deployed:

R in the event of certain frontal impacts

R if the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

R depending on whether the seat belt is being used

R independently of other air bags in the vehicle

If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are generally not deployed. If the system detects

Occupant safety

43 high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front air bags are deployed.

If a child restraint system is installed to the front-passenger seat and the 4

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up on the center console:

R a child restraint system without transponders for air bag deactivation system is installed or

R a child restraint system with transponders is not properly installed.

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.

The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds.

The deployment of the front-passenger front air bag is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification

System (OCS) ( Y page 45).

The lighter the passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required

(predicted at the start of the impact) for second-stage inflation of the front-passenger front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum amount of propellant gas available.

The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if:

R the system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied.

R the 45 indicator lamp on the center console is not lit ( Y page 45).

R the air bag control unit predicts a high impact severity.

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag : deploys underneath the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ; underneath the glove box. They deploy together with the front air bags. They are designed to operate together with the front air bags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The knee bags operate at best in conjunction with correctly positioned and fastened seat belts.

Knee bags provide increased protection for the driver and front passenger against the risk of:

R knee injuries

R thigh injuries

R lower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

G WARNING

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat coverings can cause a malfunction of the side impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

G WARNING

The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including, for example, the addition of door speakers.

Z

44

Occupant safety

Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized


Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags; deploy next to the outer seat cushions.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the:

R head

R neck

R arms

The side impact air bags are deployed:

R on the side on which an impact occurs

R at the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact

R independently of the use of the seat belt

R independently of the front air bags

R independently of the ETDs

If the vehicle overturns, the side impact air bags are generally not deployed. side impact air bags are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that side impact air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt.

Side impact air bags will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.

The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side is not deployed in the following situations:

R

OCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied.

R the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.

The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side will deploy if the frontpassenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNING

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat coverings can cause a malfunction of the side impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.

Occupant safety

45

Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions. They are deployed:





R independently of the ETDs

If the vehicle overturns, the pelvis air bags are generally not deployed. Exception: if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt.

Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.

The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in the following situations:

R OCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied.

R the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.

The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags : enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.

window curtain air bags : enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.

The window curtain air bags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.

Window curtain air bags are deployed:



R on the driver's and the front passenger's side if the vehicle overturns and the system determines that window curtain air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt


R regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied


Window curtain air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Window curtain air bags

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Method of operation

G WARNING

If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front-passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the 45 indicator lamp goes out.

In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front-passenger front air

Z

46

Occupant safety bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front-passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty.

When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical

12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.

When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.

When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the

45 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the frontpassenger seat, remain illuminated or go out.

With the 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the 45 indicator lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated and will not be deployed.

If the 45 indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are activated and will be deployed:

R in the event of certain frontal impacts

R if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

R independently of the side impact air bag or pelvis air bag

If the front-passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by:

R the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit

R the front passenger's weight category as identified by OCS

G WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible.

Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower ISOFIX child seat retaining loops and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the infant or child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag.

Occupant safety

47

Note the following important information if it is necessary to carry a child on the frontpassenger seat:

R Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag and the frontpassenger knee bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical

12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat.

R A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat.

R If you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the

45 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated. Should the 45 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the

45 indicator lamp while driving to make sure that the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 45 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat could be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag is deployed.

R If you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat:

-

move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child

secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions

R For children larger than the typical 12month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag may or may not be activated.

G WARNING

If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the 45 indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the

OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger front air bag and the front passenger knee bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Contact an authorized


Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS:

R Sit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.

R When seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category.

R Read and observe all warnings in this chapter.

Z

48

Occupant safety

If the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, the

45 indicator lamp : does not light up.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the frontpassenger seat by means of a weight sensor.

The front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated automatically for certain weight categories.

The 45 indicator lamp shows you the current status. If the 45 indicator lamp lights up, the front-passenger air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are disabled.

The system does not deactivate:

R the side impact air bag

R the pelvis air bag

R the window curtain air bag

R the Emergency Tensioning Devices

To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit:

R with the seat belt fastened correctly

R in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest

R with their feet on the floor

The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by leaning on the armrest.

If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the 45 indicator lamp to determine whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly.

Also observe the air bag display messages, which appear in the instrument cluster

( Y page 235).

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy.

The OCS may have detected that the seat:

R is empty or occupied by the weight of a typical child up to twelve months old, seated in a child restraint system

R is occupied by a small individual, such as a young teenager or a small adult

R is occupied by a child in a child restraint system whose weight is greater than that of a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCS deactivates the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag. Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the driver's air bag.

For further information, see "Air bag display messages" ( Y page 235).

System self-test

G WARNING

If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat.

G WARNING

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside and rear side child restraint system must be placed entirely on the seat cushion and the

backrest of the front-passenger seat backrest.

If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger seat backrest.

An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child restraint systems.

The 45 indicator lamp lights up:

R if you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2

R if you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with

KEYLESS-GO

R if an adult is seated properly on the frontpassenger seat and the OCS classifies the occupant as an adult

The 45 indicator lamp goes out after approximately six seconds.

If the seat is not occupied and the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is empty, the 45 indicator lamp will continue to light up. The 45 frontpassenger front air bag warning lamp then stays lit continuously.

For more information about the OCS, see

"Problems with the Occupant Classification

System" ( Y page 50).

Occupant safety

49

Z

50

Occupant safety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

G WARNING

If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

G WARNING

If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical

12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem

The 45 indicator lamp lights up and stays on.

The person on the front-passenger seat:

R has the weight of a typical adult

R has been determined by the system not to be a child

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The OCS is malfunctioning.

X

X

Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display ( Y page 235).

Problem

The 45 indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on.

The front-passenger seat is:

R unoccupied

R occupied with a weight up to that of a typical twelvemonth-old child in a standard child restraint system


The OCS is malfunctioning.

X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.

X

X

X

Check the installation of the child restraint system.

Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.

If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat as long as the OCS is not functioning.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display ( Y page 235).

Occupant safety

51

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-

PRO luxury head restraints


G WARNING

Do not attach any objects (e.g. a coat hanger) to the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints. Otherwise, the NECK-

PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints may not function properly and in the event of a rear-end collision may not offer the protection they are designed to provide.

G WARNING

Seat or head restraint covers can cause a malfunction when the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraints are activated or when the side impact air bags or pelvis air bags are deployed, or they can prevent this completely. The NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraints or side impact air bags/pelvis air bags can therefore not provide the intended protection.

Do not use any seat or head restraint covers.

G WARNING

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

G WARNING

For reasons of safety, have the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end collision.

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints increase protection of the driver's and front-passenger's head and neck. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support.

If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats

( Y page 52). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

NECK-PRO head restraints

G WARNING

When pushing back the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to observe this could result in injuries.

NECK-PRO head restraints

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go.

Z

52

Occupant safety

X

X

Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages.

Repeat this procedure for the second

NECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

X

X

X

X

Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet.

Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint.

Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage.

Pull out resetting tool :.

X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back = until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second

NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet.

i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-

PRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE

®

system

G WARNING

The PRE-SAFE ® system reduces the impact of an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as their seat belts have been fastened correctly.

Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-

SAFE ® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You should therefore always drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions.

G WARNING

Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you adjust the seat.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

PRE-SAFE ® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations.

PRE-SAFE ® intervenes:

R if BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency braking situations

R if, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, BAS

PLUS intervenes powerfully

R if, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations

R in critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely

PRE-SAFE ® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:

R the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

R the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position.

R vehicles with a multicontour seat or active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the

Occupant safety

53 side bolsters of the seat cushion and backrest is increased.

R if the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains.

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE ® slackens the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the side bolsters on the multicontour seat/active multicontour seat is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE ® can then be reversed.

If the seat belts are not released:

X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary.

The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

More information about seat belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRE-

SAFE ® , can be found under "Seat belt adjustment" ( Y page 56).

Seat belts


G WARNING

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.

Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only protect as intended if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

G WARNING

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body.

G WARNING

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

G WARNING

Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced and the anchorages checked.

Only use seat belts that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Never tamper with seat belts. This can result in the unintended deployment of the

Emergency Tensioning Devices or the failure to deploy when necessary.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may severely weaken them. In the event of a collision, they may be unable to provide adequate protection.

Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

54

Occupant safety

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:

R all 50 states

R U.S. territories

R the District of Columbia

R all Canadian provinces

Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"

( Y page 58) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNING

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

R

Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident.

R Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers.

The integrated restraint system includes

SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee bag, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window curtain air bags for the side windows),

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.

The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side

(side impact air bags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs).

R Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.

In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.

Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the seat belt outlet.

R Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.

R Never wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries.

R Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.

R Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects at the same time.

R Seat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the seat belt to distribute impact forces.

The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries.

R Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.

R Place the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible.

R Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned.

Occupant safety

55

R Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

R When using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNING

Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.

This could damage the seat belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible.

Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the

"Children in the vehicle" section.

A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

X

X

Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position ( Y page 96).

Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :.

X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis.

X

X

X

Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.

Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body

( Y page 56).

If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height ( Y page 56).

If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor"

( Y page 60).

For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" ( Y page 56).

Z

56

Occupant safety

Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.

The belt strap is tightened slightly when:

R you engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

R the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle.

The seat-belt adjustment will apply a retraction force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer ( Y page 223).

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE ® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE ® can be found under "PRE-SAFE ® (preventative occupant protection)" ( Y page 52).

Belt height adjustment

X

X

Slide the belt sash guide downwards.

Release belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged.

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt.

Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.

X Slide belt tongue ; back to belt sash guide :.

You can adjust the seat belt height on the front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that allows the upper part of the seat belt to be routed across the center of your shoulder.

X

X

To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.

The belt sash guide engages in various positions.

To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :.

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger

Regardless of whether the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts have already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts.

Occupant safety

57

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone goes out after approximately six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If after six seconds the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belts and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up:

R until the driver's or front passenger's seat belt is fastened

R once the vehicle has exceeded a speed of

15 mph (25 km/h), in addition a warning tone will sound with increasing intensity for up to 60 seconds or until the driver's or front-passenger seat belt is fastened.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the

7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds again.

The warning tone ceases after 60 seconds even if the driver or front passenger has still not fastened their seat belt. The 7 seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated.

After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).

The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes out if:

R both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts.

or

R the vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" ( Y page 256).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt force limiters

G WARNING

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed must be renewed.

For your safety, when disposing of Emergency

Tensioning Devices, always observe the safety instructions. These are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PRE-SAFE ® system has electrically operated reversible pre-tensioners that do not require replacement after activation.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency

Tensioning Device could be triggered in the event of an accident.

The seat belts are equipped with Emergency

Tensioning Devices and belt force limiters.

The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body.

The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.

The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest.

If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced.

When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant.

The belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This results in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area.

The ETDs can only be activated when:

R the ignition is switched on.

R the restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp" ( Y page 39).

R

Z

58

Children in the vehicle

R the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.

R the front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the front-passenger side.

The ETDs on the seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts.

The ETDs are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident:

R if, in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact

R if, in the event of a side impact, on the side opposite the impact the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction

R if, in certain situations where the vehicle overturns, the system determines that it can provide additional protection

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up.


Child restraint systems


G WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat:

R Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.

R For children larger than the typical

12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated.

Always make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

R A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.

R If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do


59 so, make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation.

Periodically check the 4 5 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 4

5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the

4 5 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates.

R If you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNING

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.


Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts.

Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

G WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could:

R injure themselves on parts of the vehicle

R be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold

R injure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic.

Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts.

G WARNING

Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place.

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of

R strong braking maneuvers

R sudden changes of direction

R an accident

Z

60


Further information on secure stowage of loads can be found under "Loading guidelines".

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:

R

Secure the child with a child or infant seat restraint system appropriate to the age and weight of the child.

R Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always properly secure all infants and children with a child or infant seat restraint system for the trip.

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:

R all 50 states

R U.S. territories

R the District of Columbia

R all Canadian provinces

Infants and children must always be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All infant or child restraint systems must meet the following standards:

R

U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards 213 and 225

R

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

An information label on the child restraint system indicates whether it meets these standards. This information is also provided in the installation instructions supplied with the child restraint system.

Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior or on the infant or child restraint.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNING

If you release the seat belt when driving, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

The released seat belt cannot be engaged again while driving, because the inertia reel pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The child restraint system is no longer properly secured. There is an increased risk of serious injury or even fatal injury.

Always keep the seat belt of the activated special seat belt retractor engaged when driving.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor.

When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured.

Installing a child restraint system:

X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

X

X

Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat belt retractor retract it again.

While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated.

Push down on the child restraint system to take up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor:

X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.

The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.


61

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear

G WARNING

Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts.

Position shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck.

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

Install the child restraint system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Attach the child restraint system to both securing rings.

An incorrectly installed child restraint system could come loose during an accident and seriously or even fatally injure the child.

Child restraint systems or child seat securing rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as the result of a collision must be replaced.

the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats.

Secure child restraint systems without a

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system using the seat belts in the vehicle.

When installing child restraint systems, you must observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Top Tether

Top Tether anchorages

G WARNING

Always lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position when the rear seats are occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position before installing the Top Tether straps or when the cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure that rear seat backrests are secured properly by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.

If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the seat backrest could fold forward. The child restraint system is no longer supported properly or held in position and can no longer fulfill its function. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

Securing rings

When installing the ISOFIX child restraint system, fold protective caps ; of securing rings : inwards.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on

Z

62


X

Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A.

Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that

Top Tether belt A is tight.

Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount, and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.

The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints.

X Move head restraint : upwards.

X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage

=.

X

X

Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars.

Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =.

X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted.

X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =.

X Slide down head restraint : until it engages ( Y page 99).

Child-proof locks


G WARNING










63

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNING

Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the rear doors with the child-proof locks.

X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.

If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment.

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :.

X

X

Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.

To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;.

Override feature for the rear side windows

G WARNING

When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, activate the override switch. Otherwise, the children could be injured, e.g. by trapping themselves in the rear side window.


Driving safety systems overview

In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:

R

ABS ( Anti-lock Braking System)

( Y page 64)

R

BAS ( Brake Assist System) ( Y page 64)

R BAS PLUS ( Brake Assist System PLUS)

( Y page 65)

R ESP ® ( Electronic Stability Program)

( Y page 66)

R

EBD ( electronic brake force distribution)

( Y page 69)

R ADAPTIVE BRAKE( Y page 69)

R PRE-SAFE ® Brake ( Y page 69)


If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics.

Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are

Z

64

Driving safety systems responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. ( Y page 326).

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph

(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently.

The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running.

Braking

X

X

If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.

To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)


i Observe the "Important safety notes" section ( Y page 63).

G WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired.

Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp ( Y page 258) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster ( Y page 229).

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake.

This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.

BAS (Brake Assist System)


G WARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.


65

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)


BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.

BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds greater than

4 mph (7 km/h) and uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation.

With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS

PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

BAS PLUS can also react to stationary obstacles, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles, at speeds of up to approximately 40 mph

(70 km/h).

To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if:

R you approach an obstacle, and

R

BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision

For speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you apply the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS automatically increases the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.

For speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h): if you apply the brakes, BAS PLUS is activated.

Braking is performed as late as possible.

If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE ® ) are activated simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if:

R you release the brake pedal.

R there is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision.

R no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.

For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be:

R switched on ( Y page 223)

R operational ( Y page 243)

If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,

BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS.

G WARNING

BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. BAS

PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is:

R dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors

R snow or heavy rain

R interference by other radar sources

R the possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages

R a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike

R a vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle

G WARNING

BAS PLUS does not react:

R to people or animals

R to oncoming vehicles

R to crossing traffic

R when cornering

As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.


Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified

Z

66

Driving safety systems specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

i This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, altering or tampering with the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way.


ESP

®

(Electronic Stability Program)



G WARNING

If ESP ® is malfunctioning, ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP ® qualified specialist workshop.

checked at a

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the ignition when the parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer.

Application of the brakes by ESP ® may otherwise destroy the brake system.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the notes on

ESP ® ( Y page 320).

ESP ® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP ® is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the information on warning lamps

( Y page 260) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster

( Y page 229).

If ESP ® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP ® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP ® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

If ESP ® intervenes, the ÷ ESP ® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

If ESP ® intervenes:

X

X

X

Do not deactivate ESP ® under any circumstances.

Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.

i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP ® function properly.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Traction control is part of ESP ® .

Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive torque is also transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP ® .


67

Deactivating/activating ESP

®

AMG vehicles)

(except

G WARNING

If you deactivate ESP ® , ESP ® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP ® in the situations described in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP ® deactivated.

You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To deactivate:( Y page 218).

The å ESP ® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: ( Y page 218).

The å ESP ® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

ESP ® is activated automatically when the engine is started.

The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP ® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP ® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP ® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.

If ESP ® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP ® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP ® will not stabilize the vehicle.

It may be best to deactivate ESP ® in the following situations:

R when using snow chains

R in deep snow

R on sand or gravel

If you deactivate ESP ® :

R ESP ® no longer improves driving stability.

R traction control is still activated.

R ESP ® still provides support when you brake.

R engine torque is not limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction.


®

vehicles)

(AMG

Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents.

Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following.

X To activate: briefly press button :.

The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display.

SPORT handling mode is designed for driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired.

Driving in SPORT handling mode requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver who is able to cope with these critical driving conditions.

X To deactivate: briefly press button :.

The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Z

68



It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations:


R in deep snow

R on sand or gravel

If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP ® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP ® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.

When SPORT handling mode is activated:

R ESP ® only improves driving stability to a limited degree.


R ESP ® still provides support when you brake.

R engine torque is only restricted to a limited degree, and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction.

Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the

ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP ® remains in its previously selected status.

Example: if ESP ® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP ® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP ®

G WARNING



! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP ® deactivated.

You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To deactivate: press button : until the

å ESP ® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display.

Deactivate ESP ® when driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired. Driving without

ESP ® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver who is able to cope with these critical driving conditions.

X To activate: briefly press button :.

The å ESP ® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON message appears in the multifunction display.


If ESP ® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP ® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP ® will not stabilize the vehicle.

It may be best to deactivate ESP ® following situations:

in the


R in deep snow

R on sand or gravel

If you deactivate ESP ® :

R ESP ® no longer improves driving stability.



69

R PRE-SAFE ® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP ® intervenes.

R PRE-SAFE ® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and

ESP ® intervenes.

R

ABS still provides support when you brake.

R engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction.

Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the

ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP ® remains in its previously selected status.

Example: if ESP ® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP ® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.

EBD (electronic brake force distribution)


G WARNING

If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps ( Y page 258) as well as display messages ( Y page 231).

EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE

BRAKE also has the HOLD function

( Y page 178) and hill start assist

( Y page 142).

PRE-SAFE

®

Brake


PRE-SAFE ® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.

PRE-SAFE ® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-

SAFE ® Brake detects a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE ®

Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention.

Above a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you are very quickly approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.

X or

Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

If the driver and front passenger have their seat belt fastened, PRE-SAFE ® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically at speeds from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) to approximately 124 mph (200 km/h).

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE ® Brake.

Z

70


You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-

SAFE ® Brake at any time by:

R depressing the accelerator pedal further

R activating kickdown

R releasing the brake pedal.

The braking action of PRE-SAFE ® Brake is ended automatically if:

R you maneuver to avoid the obstacle.

R there is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision.

R there is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle.

With the help of the radar sensor system,

PRE-SAFE ® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

At speeds of up to 40 mph (70 km/h), PRE-

SAFE ® Brake can also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles.

If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE ®

Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE ® ) are activated

( Y page 52). If, at speeds over 20 mph

(30 km/h), a risk of collision remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or significantly accelerate, automatic braking may be performed up to the level of emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided.

G WARNING

PRE-SAFE ® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake.

Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.

G WARNING

PRE-SAFE ® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions.

In these cases, PRE-SAFE ® Brake may:

R give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle

R not give a warning or intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if

PRE-SAFE ® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is:

R dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors

R snow or heavy rain

R interference by other radar sources

R the possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages

R a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike

R a vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle

G WARNING

PRE-SAFE ® Brake does not react:

R to people or animals

R to oncoming vehicles

R to crossing traffic

R when cornering

As a result, PRE-SAFE ® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.


Theft deterrent locking system

71

In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE ® Brake in the onboard computer ( Y page 218).

When PRE-SAFE ® Brake is activated, the

Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display, as long as the HOLD function is deactivated ( Y page 178). On vehicles with the Active Parking Assist driving system, the Ä symbol is displayed when position

P is engaged or you are driving faster than

22 mph (35 km/h).

For PRE-SAFE ® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on ( Y page 223) and be operational.

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".

The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, altering or tampering with the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way.


i Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:


2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way.



Immobilizer

X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X

X

To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Anyone can start the engine if a valid

SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Z

72


X

X

To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately

15 seconds.

To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open:

R a door

R the vehicle with the mechanical key

R the trunk lid

R the hood

X To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey.

The alarm is switched off.

or

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.


X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The

SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.


or

X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.


The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm stays on for more than

30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a call to the Customer Assistance center automatically. The emergency call system initiates the call provided that:

R you have subscribed to the mbrace/

TELEAID Service.

R the mbrace/TELEAID Service has been activated properly.

R the required mobile phone, power supply and GPS are available.


SmartKey ............................................. 74

Doors .................................................... 80

Trunk .................................................... 82

Side windows ...................................... 87

Sliding sunroof .................................... 90

73

74

SmartKey




SmartKey


G WARNING



Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could:

R injure themselves on vehicle parts

R be seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold

R injure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic.

Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts.

G WARNUNG

If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the weight acting on the SmartKey could cause it to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the steering wheel. This could cause the engine to be switched off suddenly. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to the SmartKey that is inserted in the ignition.

i USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the






i Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of





SmartKey

75


R Do not keep the SmartKey:

with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey

-

with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

This can affect the SmartKey's functionality.

Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.

When locking, they flash three times.

You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer ( Y page 222).

When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer ( Y page 221).

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a

KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle

; F To unlock the trunk lid

= % To unlock the vehicle

X To unlock centrally: press the % button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:

R the vehicle is locked again.

R the theft deterrent locking system is armed again.

X To lock centrally: press the & button.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:

R the doors

R the trunk lid

R the fuel filler flap

Locking and unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey. When the engine is started and whilst you are driving,

KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid

SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact.

You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with those of a conventional key, e.g. using

KEYLESS-GO to unlock and pressing the

& button to lock.

When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

Z

76

SmartKey

X

X

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.

To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :.

X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period.

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid handle.

Further information on the convenience closing feature ( Y page 88).

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

X To unlock the driver's door: press the

% button once.

X

X

To unlock centrally: press the % button twice.

To lock centrally: press the & button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:

X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice ( Y page 77).

Changing the settings of the locking system

You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own.

X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons on the

SmartKey simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice ( Y page 77).

i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button:

R locks or

R unlocks the vehicle

Mechanical key

General notes

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered

( Y page 71).

There are several ways to turn off the alarm:

X or

To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey.

X or

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-

GO: press the Start/Stop button in the

SmartKey

77 ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

or

X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.

X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

and regard for the environment. Observe government disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/

index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the battery

Removing the mechanical key

:

;

Release catch

Mechanical key

X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery


G WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries out of the reach of children.

If a battery has been swallowed, seek medical help immediately.

G WARNING

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling

X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery ( Y page 77).

i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button:

R locks or

R unlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery in any qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey ( Y page 76).

Z

78

SmartKey

:

;

Battery compartment cover

Mechanical key

X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X

X

X

Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it.

Insert mechanical key ; into the


Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

= Battery

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination.

SmartKey

79

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem

You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.


The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or

& button.

If this does not work:

X

X

Check the SmartKey battery ( Y page 77) and replace it if necessary ( Y page 77).

Lock ( Y page 82) or unlock ( Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Lock ( Y page 82) or unlock ( Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button.

You have lost a

SmartKey.

You have lost the mechanical key.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


X

X

Check the SmartKey battery ( Y page 77) and replace it if necessary ( Y page 77).

Lock ( Y page 82) or unlock ( Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

X

X

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

X

X

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z

80

Doors

Problem

The engine cannot be started using the

SmartKey.


The on-board voltage is too low.

X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.


X or

X Jump-start the vehicle ( Y page 317).

or

Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary

( Y page 316).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using KEYLESS-

GO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as easily.

X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors


G WARNING









G WARNING





R an accident

Doors

81

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.

You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks ( Y page 63).

The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.

If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside:

R the vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked

R only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

X Pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside.

X To unlock: press button :.

X To lock: press button ;.

If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.

You could therefore lock yourself out if:

R the vehicle is being pushed.

R the vehicle is being towed.

R the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer ( Y page 222).

Z

82

Trunk

Unlocking the driver's door

(mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

X

X

Take the mechanical key out of the


Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X

X

X

Close the driver's door.



Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

1

To unlock

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1.

The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the

SmartKey.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered ( Y page 71).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the

SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

X

X

X

X

Open the driver's door.

Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk lid.

Press the locking button ( Y page 81).

Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs manually, if necessary ( Y page 81).

1 Locking

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the

SmartKey.

Trunk


G WARNING

Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

Trunk

83

G WARNING









G WARNING





R an accident

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid

( Y page 371).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out.

Vehicles without trunk lid remote closing

feature: the trunk lid can be:

R opened and closed manually from outside

R opened automatically from outside

R opened automatically from inside

R locked separately

R unlocked with the mechanical key

R opened with the emergency release button

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing

feature: the trunk lid can be:

R opened and closed manually from outside

R opened and closed automatically from outside

R opened and closed automatically from inside

R locked separately

R unlocked with the mechanical key

R opened with the emergency release button

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the % button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle :.

Z

84

Trunk

Closing

G WARNING

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Opening

You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.

X or

Press and hold the F button on the key until the trunk lid opens.

X If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and release it again immediately

( Y page 83).

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey

( Y page 75) or with KEYLESS-GO

( Y page 75).

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and then opens again.

Opening/closing automatically from outside


G WARNING




( Y page 371).

Closing

G WARNING

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:

R

Press button F on the SmartKey.

R Press the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the driver's door).

R Press the trunk closing switch.

R

Press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.

R

Pull the trunk lid handle.

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-

GO removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk opening/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Trunk

85

Closing button and locking button (example: vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and

KEYLESS-GO)

:

Closing button

;

Locking button

X To close: press closing button : in the trunk lid.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing

feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close and lock the trunk lid.

X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.

i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the trunk, the trunk lid will not lock.

Opening/closing automatically from inside


G WARNING

Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the trunk lid with the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured.

To interrupt the closing procedure, release the door mounted remote trunk opening/ closing switch again.

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-

GO removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk opening/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

G WARNING


G WARNING

Keep an eye on the area at the rear end of the vehicle when operating the trunk lid/tailgate with the remote operating switch on the door.

Monitor the entire closing procedure to ensure that there is no risk of injury to anyone near the vehicle.

Release the switch on the door to interrupt the closing procedure.

The remote operating switch can also be used if the SmartKey has been removed from the starter switch or the KEYLESS-GO key has been removed from the vehicle. Never leave children with no adult supervision in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

If unsupervised children have access to a vehicle, it could lead to an accident and/or serious injury.

G WARNING

Ensure that the trunk lid/tailgate is closed when the engine is running and the vehicle is in motion. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle interior and cause unconsciousness and even death.


( Y page 371).

Z

86

Trunk

Opening/closing

X

X

To open: pull remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.

To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is closed.

You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.

1

2

Neutral position.

To unlock

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2.

The trunk is unlocked.

X

X

Turn the mechanical key back to position

1 and remove it.

Insert the mechanical key into the

SmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)


If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered ( Y page 71).

X

X



Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as the stop.

Trunk emergency release

You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button : briefly.

The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving.

The trunk lid emergency release does not open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged.

Side windows

87

Trunk lid emergency release light:

R emergency release button : flashes for

30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened

R emergency release button : flashes for

60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows


G WARNING

When opening or closing the door windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure.

The door windows are equipped with automatic operation and the anti-entrapment feature. If in automatic mode a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path, the anti-entrapment feature will stop the door window and open it slightly.

The door windows operate differently when the switch is pulled. See the "Problems with door windows" section for details.

The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the windows by pressing and holding the & button on the SmartKey or by pressing and holding the lock button

(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle, the anti-entrapment feature will not operate.

Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window opening.

G WARNING

Do not keep any part of your body up against the window pane when opening a window. The downward motion of the pane may pull that part of your body down between the window pane and the door frame and trap it there. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch and pull it to close the window.

Opening and closing the side windows

The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window.

The switches on the driver's door take precedence.

:

;

=

?

Front left

Front right

Rear right

Rear left

X

X

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

To open: press the corresponding switch.

To close: pull the corresponding switch.

i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or

Z

88

Side windows remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i When the override feature for the side windows is activated ( Y page 63), the side windows cannot be operated from the rear.

Convenience opening

General notes

You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously:

R unlock the vehicle

R open the side windows

R open the sliding sunroof

R switch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The

SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.

If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:

R Release the & button to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold the

% button. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold the

& button.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:

R

Release the sensor surface on the outside door handle to stop the closing procedure.

R

Immediately pull on the same outside door handle and hold firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:

R close the side windows

R close the sliding sunroof

Convenience opening

X

X

Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.

Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button.

Using the SmartKey

The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.

X

X

X

Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.

Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.

Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button.

Convenience closing


G WARNING

When closing the door windows and the sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

Using KEYLESS-GO

The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed.

Side windows

89

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.

i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :.

X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it.

X

X

X

X

Close all the doors.


Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed ( Y page 87).

Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

X

X

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed ( Y page 87).

Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly.

If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Z

90

Sliding sunroof

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING

Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows.

G WARNING

Pulling and holding the switch to close the door window immediately after it had been blocked two times will cause the door window to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold the switch.

Problem

A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g.

leaves in the window guide.


X

X

Remove the objects.

Close the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof


G WARNING

When opening or closing the sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure.

The sliding sunroof is equipped with automatic operation and the anti-entrapment feature. If the movement of the sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.

The sliding sunroof operates differently when the sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held.

See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof" section for more details.

The opening/closing procedure of the sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if the sliding sunroof switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the sliding sunroof switch in any direction.

Sliding sunroof

91

G WARNING

The sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter.

This may result in an opening in the roof.

In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly, as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.

Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel

:

To raise

;

=

To open

To close/lower

X

X


Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction.

i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.

The automatic opening and raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed.

The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door.

Resetting

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

92

Sliding sunroof

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

X

X

Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear

( Y page 91).

Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second.

X

X

Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again ( Y page 91).

If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Sliding sunroof

93

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING

You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNING

Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof switch to close the sliding sunroof immediately after it had been blocked two times will cause the sliding sunroof to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold the switch.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.


If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.

The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.

The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Z

94


Correcting the driver's seat posi-

tion ....................................................... 96

Seats .................................................... 97

Steering wheel .................................. 103

Mirrors ............................................... 105

Memory function .............................. 107

95

96

Correcting the driver's seat position




Correcting the driver's seat position

X

X

Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment ( Y page 97).

Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly.

Electrical seat adjustment ( Y page 98)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:

R you are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible.

R you are sitting in a normal upright position.

R you can fasten the seat belt properly.

R you have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position.

R you have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported.

R you can depress the pedals properly.

X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly.

When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint.

X

X

Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment ( Y page 103).

Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

( Y page 103)

When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that:

R you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.

R you can move your legs freely.

R you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.

X

X

Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts

( Y page 53).

Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly ( Y page 55).

The seat belt should:

R fit snugly across your body

R be routed across the middle of your shoulder

R be routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints

X

X

Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions ( Y page 105).

Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function

( Y page 107).

Seats

97

Seats


G WARNING

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when adjusting the seat.

G WARNING

Make sure that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. If your head is not supported correctly by the head restraint, you could suffer a severe neck injury in the event of an accident. Never drive if the head restraints are not engaged and set correctly.

G WARNING

In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle control, all seat, head restraint, steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before setting the vehicle in motion.

G WARNING

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving.

Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and seat belts are properly positioned on the body.

G WARNING

Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt.

Observe the following points:

R adjust the seat backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

R adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far back as possible with the driver still able to operate the controls properly.

R adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

R never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

G WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible.

Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the

"Children in the vehicle" section.


! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:

R keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.

R if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat

Z

98

Seats heating should also not be used to dry the seats.

R clean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section.

R do not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.

The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.

R when the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:

R keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.

R if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats.

R clean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care".

R do not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.

The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.

R when the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front seats are installed with the NECK-PRO system

( Y page 51). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats.

For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:

R Rear bench seat through-loading feature

( Y page 273)

Adjusting the seats electrically

:

;

=

?

A

Head restraint height

Seat cushion angle

Seat height

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Backrest angle i If PRE-SAFE ® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position.

i You can store the seat settings using the memory function ( Y page 107).

i Vehicles with the through-loading feature: if you fold down a rear seat backrest, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly in order to avoid contact.

Seats

99

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints electrically

X To adjust the head restraint height: slide switch for head restraint adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

G WARNING

When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of becoming trapped.

Rear seat head restraints


G WARNING

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust the head restraints so that they are as close as possible to your head. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Whenever the rear seats are occupied, only drive the vehicle with the head restraints installed and engaged. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

G WARNING

Make sure that the rear seat head restraints are engaged. Otherwise, their protective function cannot be guaranteed.

Otherwise, the back of the head will not be supported in the event of a collision. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

Rear seat occupants could be severely or even fatally injured.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right and/or lefthand side bolster : into the desired position.

X To adjust the angle of the head

restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;.

X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until it is in the desired position.

Z

100

Seats

Removing and installing the rear seat head restraints

G WARNING

Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints installed. This reduces the risk of injury to occupants in the event of an accident.

! Make sure that the rear window roller sunblind has been retracted before the rear head restraints are removed. You could otherwise damage the roller sunblind.

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop.

X

X

Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides.

To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.

:

;

=

?

To adjust the thigh cushion

To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar region

To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region

To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest

You can adjust the contour of the front seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.

Adjusting the active multicontour seat

Overview

Adjusting the multicontour seat

The multicontour seat function is only available on vehicles for Canada.

:

;

=

?

To adjust the seat cushion length

To switch the dynamic function on or off

To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest

To switch the massage function on or off

Seats

101

A

B

To adjust the contour of the backrest to increase/decrease support

To adjust the height/depth of the backrest contour

The active multicontour seat on the driver's side automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style. You can adjust the contour of the seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides.

X To switch on: press button ? once or twice until the desired level is set.

One or two indicator lamps in button ?

light up. The air cushions in the lumbar region vibrate for approximately

20 minutes.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Dynamic function

The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to ensure ideal lateral support at all times.

X To switch on: press button ; once or twice until the desired level is set.

One or two indicator lamps in button ; light up.

X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly until all indicator lamps in button ; go out.

You can choose between two different levels.

Level 1 (one indicator lamp)

Level 2 (two indicator lamps)

Standard setting: slightly increased lateral support and slow build-up of air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest.

Sport setting: increased lateral support and fast build-up of pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest.

Massage function (PULSE)

The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. You can choose between two levels.

:

;

=

?

To raise the backrest contour

To soften the backrest contour

To lower the backrest contour

To harden the backrest contour

You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNING

Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level

3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.

The health of passengers that have limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating level 3 repeatedly.

Z

102

Seats

Switching the seat ventilation on/off


Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.

The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.

The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.

X

X

X

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.

X

X

X



To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature ( Y page 88). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.

Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.

X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Problems with the seat ventilation

The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.


Steering wheel

103

Steering wheel


G WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

The electrical steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated at any time.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

:

;

To adjust the steering wheel height

To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects:

R EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

( Y page 104)

R Storing settings ( Y page 107)

Steering wheel heating


X

X



To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;.

Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

i The steering wheel heating may switch off temporarily if:

R the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86 ‡ (30 †)

R the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95 ‡ (35 †)

Indicator lamp = remains on.

Z

104

Steering wheel

Problems with the steering wheel heating

If steering wheel heating indicator lamp = is flashing, the steering wheel heating has switched off automatically. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.


Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating will switch back on automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNING

Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure:

R press the steering column adjustment button.

R press one of the memory function position buttons.

The steering column stops moving immediately.

Do not keep the memory function position button pressed as this will start the memory function and set the steering wheel and seat in motion.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped.

G WARNING

Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier.

You can activate and deactivate the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer ( Y page 223).

Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheel swings upwards when you:

R remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

R open the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1

R open the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driving

The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when:

R the driver's door is closed.

R you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

or

R you press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position.

The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function ( Y page 107).

Mirrors

105

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.

The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNING

The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder.

X

The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position.

You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision.

The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

This function is only available in vehicles for

Canada.

X

X



Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror.

The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.

X

X



Briefly press button :.

Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 9 mph

(15 km/h) you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors


Canada.

Z

106

Mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the Fold in mirrors when locking function in the onboard computer ( Y page 223).

X

X

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock.

Briefly press button :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically


Canada.

If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer

( Y page 223):

R the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.

R the exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING

If incident light from headlamps is prevented from striking the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic antiglare function will not operate.

Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

R the ignition is switched on and

R incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

Exterior mirror out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows:

X

X

Vehicles without electrically folding

exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.

Vehicles with electrically folding

exterior mirrors (only for Canada): press and hold mirror-folding button : until you hear a click and then the mirrors engage in position ( Y page 105).

The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual

( Y page 105).

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.

Memory function

107

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X

X

Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.

Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.

The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory button

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?.

X

X

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb should be visible.

X

X

Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position setting


X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;.

X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:

R as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)

R if you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNING

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions by the seat moving of its own accord, and as a result cause an accident.

With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.

The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:

R position of the seat, backrest and head restraint

R active multicontour seat: seat cushion length, lateral cushions of the seat backrest, contour of the backrest, dynamic function level

R driver's side: steering wheel position

R driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides

Z

108

Memory function

X

X

X

Adjust the seat ( Y page 98).

On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel ( Y page 103) and the exterior mirrors

( Y page 105).

Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button.

Useful information ............................ 110

Exterior lighting ................................ 110

Interior lighting ................................. 117

Replacing bulbs ................................. 119

Windshield wipers ............................ 120

109

110





Asymmetrical low-beam headlamps

Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using the:

R light switch

R combination switch ( Y page 113)

R the on-board computer ( Y page 221)



For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.

If you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the daytime running lamps function in the on-board computer

( Y page 221).

Light switch

Operation

Driving abroad

Symmetrical low-beam headlamps

Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road from the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.

Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries.

1W

2X

3T

4Ã

5L

Left-hand standing lamps

Right-hand standing lamps

Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting

Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor

Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

X Turn the light switch to Ã.


111

The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you:


R open the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNING

If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, snowing or there is poor visibility, the lowbeam headlamps will not come on automatically. This could endanger you and others. In such situations turn the light switch to L.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.

1W

2X

3T

4Ã

5L






Ã is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):

R

SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off

X automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

R

With the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

To switch on automatic headlamp

mode: turn the light switch to Ã.

Only for Canada:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light brightness: if you turn the light switch to T, you turn on the daytime running lamps and parking lamps.

If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

USA only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer

( Y page 221).

If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

i In the USA, the daytime running lamps are deactivated upon delivery from the factory.

Z

112


Low-beam headlamps

G WARNING

If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, snowing or there is poor visibility, the lowbeam headlamps will not come on automatically. This could endanger you and others. In such situations turn the light switch to L.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.

Parking lamps

! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the

X right or the W left standing lamp.

1W

2X

3T

4Ã

5L






Even if the light sensor does not detect that is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the SmartKey is inserted into the ignition lock and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog.

X

X

To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

Turn the light switch to L.

The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

1W

2X

3T

4Ã

5L






X To switch on: turn light switch to T.

The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

1W

2X




113

3T

4Ã

5L




Switching on the parking lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

X

X

To switch on the standing lamps: the

SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0.

Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle).

High-beam headlamps

Combination switch

Turn signals

:

;

=

?

High-beam headlamps

Turn signal, right

High-beam flasher

Turn signal, left

X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?.

The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?.

:

;

=

?

High-beam headlamps

Turn signal, right

High-beam flasher

Turn signal, left

X

X

To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

Turn the light switch to L or Ã.

X

X

Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

In the Ã position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running.

The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the highbeam headlamps are switched on.

To switch off the high-beam

headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position.

The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation of the high-beam headlamps ( Y page 115).

Z

114


High-beam flasher

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if:

R an air bag is deployed.

R the vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a halt.

If the vehicle returns to a speed of over

6 mph (10 km/h) after a full application of the brakes, the hazard warning lamps are deactivated automatically.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

:

;

=

?

High-beam headlamps

Turn signal, right

High-beam flasher

Turn signal, left

X

X

To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine.

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =.

Headlamp cleaning system

The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times ( Y page 120) while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0.

Hazard warning lamps

Cornering light function

X

X

To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

To switch off the hazard warning

lamps: press button :.

The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on.


115

Active:

R if you are driving at speeds below

25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel.

R if you are driving at speeds between

25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel.

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above

25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn signals or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.

The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Active light function

The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists and animals.

Active: when the lights are switched on.

vehicle lighting in accordance with the prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.

The system may be impaired or unavailable when

R visibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray

R the optical sensor area of the windshield is dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for example

The system cannot recognize the following road users:

R Road users without a lighting system of their own, e.g. pedestrians

R Road users with dim lighting of their own, e.g. cyclists

R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. road users behind a guardrail

R In some seldom cases, even road users with a lighting system of their own may be recognized too late or not at all.

The automatic high-beam headlamps will then not be deactivated or it will be activated in spite of preceding or oncoming road users.

This could endanger you and/or others and cause an accident. Always pay close attention to the traffic situation and switch off the high beam manually if necessary.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist


G WARNING

The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid intended to support you while driving. The driver is and remains responsible for proper

Z

116


Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam.

The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

:

;

=

?

High-beam headlamps

Turn signal, right

High-beam flasher

Turn signal, left

X

X

To activate: activate the Adaptive

Highbeam Assist function using the onboard computer ( Y page 221).

Turn the light switch to Ã.

X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : .

The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.

If you drive at speeds above approximately

28 mph (45 km/h): the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: the high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.

If you drive at speeds below approximately

30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road users are identified or if the roads are sufficiently illuminated: the high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in

Interior lighting

117

X the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.

To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position.

The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

?

A c To switch the front interior lighting on/off p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the light and drive off.

The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Rear-compartment overhead control panel

: p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off

; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off


Overview of interior lighting

Interior lighting control

General notes

In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

The color and brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer ( Y page 221).

Front overhead control panel

: u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off

;

=

| To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off p To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off

Z

118


Automatic interior lighting control Manual interior lighting control


: u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off

;

=

| To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off

?

A c To switch the front interior lighting on/off p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off

X To activate/deactivate: press the | button.

When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you:

R unlock the vehicle

R open a door


The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer

( Y page 222).


: u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off.

;

=

| To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off

?

A c To switch the front interior lighting on/off p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off

X

X

X

To switch the front interior lighting on/

off: press the c button.

To switch the rear interior lighting on/

off: press the u button.

To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lighting

The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button.

or

X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

119

Replacing bulbs


Xenon bulbs

G DANGER

Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from Xenon bulbs.

Do not change the Xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified workshop.

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times.

Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

LED lamps

You can neither replace Xenon bulbs nor LED bulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop.



There are bulbs other than Xenon and LED bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed ( Y page 119). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when installing.

Only use bulbs of the correct type.

If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop.



Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend.

Other bulbs

G WARNING

Bulbs and lamps can become very hot. For this reason, allow them to cool down before changing them. Otherwise, you could burn yourself when you touch them.

Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.

Otherwise, they could, for example, damage the bulbs and injure themselves.

Never use a bulb which has been dropped.

Such a bulb may explode and injure you.

Halogen bulbs are pressurized and could explode when you change them, especially if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them.

Tail lamp

:

Backup lamp: W 16 W

Z

120


Changing the rear bulbs

Backup lamp

Lamp cluster

X

X

X

X

Switch off the lights.

Open the trunk.

Reach up into the side paneling and pull downwards until the lamp cluster is easily accessible.

Press the detent of connector ; and pull out connector ;.

X

X

X

X

X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove four nuts :.

Remove the entire lamp cluster.

Turn bulb holder = counter-clockwise and pull it out.

Pull out the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =.

X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn it clockwise.

X

X

Re-insert the lamp cluster.

Tighten four nuts :.

X Push in connector ; until it engages.

X Insert the side paneling.


Switching the windshield wipers on/ off

G WARNING

The windshield will not longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident.

Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall.

! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry.

If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this.

Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield.

For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.


121

Combination switch

1 $ Windshield wipers off

2

3

4

5

B

Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)

Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)

° Continuous wipe, slow

¯ Continuous wipe, fast

í Single wipe/ î To wipe the windshield using washer fluid

X

X

Switch on the ignition.

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield.

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield until it engages.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNING

For safety reasons, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock before changing the wiper blades

(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure that the on-board electronics are in state 0).

Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switched on suddenly and cause injury.

X Firmly press release knob : and pull the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.

Z

122


Installing the wiper blades

X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the opposite direction to the arrow.

The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructed

X For safety reasons, you should remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X

X or

X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.

Remove the cause of the obstruction.

Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperative

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


Overview of climate control sys-

tems ................................................... 124

Operating the climate control sys-

tems ................................................... 128

Setting the air vents ......................... 133

123

124

Overview of climate control systems






G WARNING

Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident.

G WARNING

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior and the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air.

Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. The system only works optimally when the side windows and the roof are closed.

The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off ( Y page 133).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature ( Y page 88).

This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust, and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet.

Since the replacement interval depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.


125

Control panel for dual-zone climate control

Canada only

:

Sets the temperature, left ( Y page 130)

;

Defrosts the windshield ( Y page 131)

=

?

Switches the ZONE function on/off ( Y page 131)

Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification ( Y page 128)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Switches the rear window defroster on/off( Y page 132)

Sets the temperature, right ( Y page 130)

Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode ( Y page 132)

Sets the air distribution ( Y page 130)

Increases the airflow ( Y page 131)

Reduces the airflow ( Y page 131)

Switches climate control on/off ( Y page 128)

Sets climate control to automatic ( Y page 129)

Z

126


USA only

:


;


=

?

Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off ( Y page 131)


A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H









Information about using automatic climate control

The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of automatic climate control.

R

Activate climate control using the Ã and

¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the Ã and ¿ buttons light up.

R

Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

R

Only use the "defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.

R

Only use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

R

Use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out.


127

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada only

Front control panel

:


;

=


Activates/deactivates the residual heat function ( Y page 133)

?

A

B




C

D

Switches the ZONE function on/off ( Y page 131)


E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O




Adjusts the climate control settings ( Y page 129)



Rear control panel



Display

Reduces the temperature ( Y page 130)

Increases the temperature ( Y page 130)

Z

128

Operating the climate control systems

Information about using 3-zone automatic climate control

The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control.

R

Activate climate control using the Ã and

¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the Ã and ¿ buttons light up.

R

In automatic mode, you can also use the

ñ button to set a climate mode

(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The

MEDIUM level is recommended.

R

Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

R

Only use the "defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.

R

Only use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

R

Use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out.

R

Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The

"residual heat" function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off.


Activating/deactivating climate control

Points to observe before use

G WARNING

When the climate control system is deactivated, the outside air supply and circulation are also deactivated. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i Switch on climate control primarily using the Ã button ( Y page 129).


X

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

To switch on: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.

or

X Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.

X To switch off: press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up.

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification

Points to observe before use

G WARNING

If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident.

The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running.

The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.


129 i The cooling with air dehumidification function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer.


X To activate: press the ¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up.

X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature.

X

X


Set the desired temperature.

X To activate: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.

i 3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode setting

( Y page 129).

X To switch off: press the _ button.

or

X Press the I or K button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes out.

Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function

When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNING

If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level.

The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.

Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated.

Adjusting the climate mode settings

You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode:

FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler

MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting

DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less draft

X

X


Press the Ã button.

X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display.

Z

130


Setting the temperature

Climate control

Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides.

X

X


To increase/reduce: turn controls : and

B clockwise or counter-clockwise

( Y page 125).

Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 † ).

X


The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side.

To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear

control panel: press the r or s button on the rear control panel.


3-zone automatic climate control

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment.

X

X


To increase/reduce the temperature in

the front: turn controls : and B clockwise or counter-clockwise

( Y page 127).


X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front

control panel: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button goes out.

X Turn control : clockwise or counterclockwise ( Y page 127).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings

P Directs air through the center and side air vents

O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents

S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents

¯ Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and side air vents

(Canada only) a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and side air vents, as well as the footwell air vents (Canada only) i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards.

Adjusting


X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display.


131

Setting the airflow

Adjusting

X

X


To increase: press the K button.

X To reduce: press the I button.

i You can use automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately.

Switching the ZONE function on/off

X To activate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp above the á button lights up.

X

Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.

To deactivate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp above the á button goes out.

Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.

X

X


To activate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up.

The climate control system switches to the following functions:

R heating with dehumidification on

R high airflow (depending on the outside temperature)

R high temperature (depending on the outside temperature)

R air distribution to the windshield and front side windows

R air-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. The heating with air dehumidification function remains on. Airrecirculation mode remains deactivated.

or

X Press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.

or

X Turn controls : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise ( Y page 125)

(THERMATIC automatic climate control),

( Y page 127) (THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control ).

or

X Press the K or I button.

Defrosting the windshield

You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows.

Switch off the "defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.

MAX COOL maximum cooling

The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.

MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running.

Z

132


X To activate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press off-road button Ù again.

The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions:

R maximum cooling

R maximum airflow

R air-recirculation mode on the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.


X Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

X

X

Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function.

Activate automatic mode Ã.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the defrosting function ( Y page 131).

i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside

X Press the _ button repeatedly until the

P or O symbol appears in the display.

i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster


G WARNING

Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others.

The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,

Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.

X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting.

When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster is activated again automatically.

Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode

G WARNING

At low outside temperatures, only switch over to air-recirculation mode for brief periods.

Otherwise, the windows could fog up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions and thereby cause an accident.

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.

The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels.

Setting the air vents

133

X

X


To activate: press the g button.

The indicator lamp in the g button lights up.

i In the event of high pollution levels high outside temperatures, air-

1 or at recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp above the g button does not light up.

Outside air is added after about

30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press the g button.

The indicator lamp in the g button goes out.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:

R after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)

R after approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated

R after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)

X To activate: press the Ì button.

The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up.

i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed.

X To deactivate: press the Ì button.

The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out.

i It is possible that the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey is removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-conditioning system.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:

R after approximately 30 minutes

R when the ignition is switched on

R if the battery voltage drops

Activating/deactivating the residual heat function

The residual heat function is only available in vehicles for Canada with automatic climate control.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set.



G WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:

R keep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.

R never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

1 Automatic climate control only.

Z

134


Setting the center air vents

temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged.

: Center air vent, left

; Center air vent, right

= Center vent thumbwheel, right

? Center vent thumbwheel, left

X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down.

Setting the side air vents

:

;

Air vent thumbwheel

Air vent

When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings.

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or counter-clockwise.

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down.

i Side window defroster vent : is only open when side air vent ; is open.

Setting the glove box air vent

! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.

At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise,

Setting the rear-compartment air vents

Setting the center vents in the rear compartment


135

:

;

=

?

Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel

Rear-compartment air vent, right

Rear control panel, only with automatic climate control 2

Rear-compartment air vent, left

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down.

2 Only for Canada.

Z

136


Breaking-in notes .............................. 138

Driving ............................................... 138

Automatic transmission ................... 146

Refueling ............................................ 154

Parking ............................................... 157

Driving tips ........................................ 159

Driving systems ................................ 165

137

138

Driving




After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed.

Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles:

R Do not drive faster than 85 mph

(140 km/h) for the first 1000 miles

(1500 km).

R

Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.

R

Change gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speed limits.

Breaking-in notes


New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving.

Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.

R You should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first

1,000 miles (1,500 km).

R

Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period.

R

Change gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer.

R

Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle.

R

If possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance

(kickdown).

R Only select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.

AMG vehicles with rear axle locking differential

Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. To improve the protection of the differential on the rear axle, change the oil after a break-in distance of

2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil change extends the service life of the differential.

Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving


G WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats.

Driving

139

G WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.:

R shoes with thick soles

R shoes with high heels

R slippers


Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can:

R overheat and cause a fire

R lose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature.

Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g

1

2

3

To remove the SmartKey

(shift the transmission to position P)

Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers

Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position

To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct

SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

R

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together with:

electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key

metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film

R

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in metal objects, e.g. metal cases.

This can affect the functionality of

KEYLESS-GO.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-

GO start function and a detachable Start/

Stop button.

Z

140

Driving

The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different

SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.

The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the

SmartKey is in the vehicle:

R the vehicle can be started using the

Start/Stop button and

R electrically powered equipment can be operated.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;.

i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately 2 seconds' recognition time.

You can then use Start/Stop button :.

Activating power supply

X

X

Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the

SmartKey being removed from the ignition.

Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.

The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.

i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated.

Switching on the ignition

X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice.

The ignition is switched on.

i The ignition is switched off when:

R the driver's door is opened and

R you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position.

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see ( Y page 257).

Start/Stop button

= USA only

?

Canada only

Driving

141

Starting the engine


G WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

General notes

i The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time.

not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The

Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button ( Y page 139) once.

The engine starts.


X Shift the transmission to position P.

The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

i To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/

Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 3 ( Y page 139) and release it as soon as the engine is running.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine

G WARNING

As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.


SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do

Pulling away


G WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or

R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and the

Release Park. Brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake.

X

X

X

X

Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Shift the transmission to position D or R.

Release the parking brake ( Y page 158).

Release the brake pedal.

X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

Z

142

Driving i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, you can move the

DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock remains engaged.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at any time.

You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature ( Y page 222).

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

G WARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.

It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.

The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.

Hill start assist will not function if:

R you are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient.

R the transmission is in position N.

R the parking brake is applied.

R ESP ® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function


G WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving.

The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Every time you switch on the engine using the

SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated.

AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C.

The system is operational when ECO symbol

¤ is shown in green in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows the

Stop/Start active message.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-off have not been fulfilled ( Y page 143), the

¤ symbol will be shown in yellow.


Stop/Start inactive message.

If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated ( Y page 143) or a

Driving

143 malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed.

AMG vehicles: in the AMG menu on the multifunction display, the Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive display message disappears.

If the engine is switched off and the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the engine has been switched off automatically. However, all vehicle systems remain active.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function

ECO button

X To switch off (except AMG vehicles): press button :.

Indicator lamp ; on button : and the

¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out.

X To switch on (except AMG vehicles): press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off

( Y page 143) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display.

If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off ( Y page 143) are fulfilled, the

¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the

ECO start/stop function is not available.

X To switch off (AMG vehicles): press button : in drive program C.

or

X

X

Switch to drive program S, S+ or M

( Y page 150).

Indicator lamp ; on button : and the

¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out.

The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in the multifunction display goes out.

To switch on (AMG vehicles): press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C.

If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off ( Y page 143) are fulfilled, the

¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. In addition, the

Stop/Start active message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.

If conditions for automatic engine switchoff ( Y page 143) have not been fulfilled, the

¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. In addition, the Stop/Start inactive message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.

The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops.

i Every time you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the

ECO start/stop function is activated.

Automatic engine switch-off

Method of operation

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or

N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically.

Z

144

Driving

The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if:

R the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green.

R the vehicle is stationary.

R the outside temperature is within the comfort range.

R the engine is at normal operating temperature.

R the set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached.

R the battery is sufficiently charged.

R the system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on.

R the hood is closed.

R the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-off have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will be shown in yellow.


Stop/Start inactive message.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display.

i You can still activate the HOLD function when the vehicle is stationary, even if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the

HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine must be started first.

i During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the

ECO button ( Y page 143).

Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:

R you switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button.

R you release the brakes when in transmission position D or N and when the

HOLD function is not active.

R you depress the accelerator pedal.

R you engage reverse gear R.

R you move the transmission out of position

P.

R you switch to drive program S, S+ or M

(AMG vehicles).

R you unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door.

R the vehicle starts to roll.

R the brake system requires this.

R the temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range.

R the system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on.

R the charge level of the battery is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

Driving

145

Problems with the engine

Problem

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.


R

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

R

There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

X

X

Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

Try to start the engine again ( Y page 141). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:


The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged.

X Jump-start the vehicle ( Y page 317).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:


The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.

X

X

Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.

Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:


The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring.

The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above

248 ‡ (120 †).

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system.

X

X

Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X

X

Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.

Check the coolant level ( Y page 300). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Z

146




G WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or

R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

Transmission position and drive program display

! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program

C. Do not restrict the shift range.

:

;


Drive program display

The current position of the selector lever is shown by the indicators next to the selector lever.

The indicators light up when the SmartKey is inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators go out when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button j

Park position with parking lock k i h

Reverse gear

Neutral

Drive

N

D

P

R

Park position with parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral

Drive


147

The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column.

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display

( Y page 146) in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive program display

! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program

E or S. Do not restrict the shift range.

i The automatic transmission shifts into park position P automatically:

R if you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R

R if you open the door while traveling at very low speeds in transmission position

D or R

HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS: if the vehicle is braked using the HOLD function or

DISTRONIC PLUS, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P. In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

R the engine is switched off.

R the driver's door is open and the seat belt is not in the buckle.

Engaging park position P in AMG vehicles

:

;


Drive program display

The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.

i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to

R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.

X When the vehicle is stationary, press P button :.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to

R when the vehicle is stationary.

X

X

When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

Z

148


Shifting to neutral N

G WARNING

When leaving the SmartKey in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

X

X

When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N.

If the automatic transmission is to remain in neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car washes with a towing device, please observe the following instructions:

Using the SmartKey:

R make sure that the ignition is switched on.

R when the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

R shift to neutral N.

R release the brake pedal.

R if the parking brake is engaged, release it.

R switch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO:

R make sure that the ignition is switched on.

R when the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

R engage park position P.


R remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.

R insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

R switch on the ignition.

R depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

R shift to neutral N.


R if the parking brake is engaged, release it.

R switch off the ignition and leave the


Engaging drive position D

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park position

Do not shift the transmission into position P ( Y page 157) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In addition to engaging the parking lock, you must always apply the parking brake to secure the vehicle.

If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P.

Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gear

Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.


149

A Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. The transmission could otherwise be damaged.

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it.

If ESP ® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train.

7 Drive

The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.

X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.

The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and

R can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The engine management system of the vehicle limits shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R to a maximum speed of

5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the selector lever up and down beyond the pressure point.

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by:

R a shift range restriction, if selected

R the selected drive program ( Y page 149)

R the position of the accelerator pedal

R the road speed

Program selector button

General notes

Driving tips

AMG vehicles

When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected.

Program selector button on all models except AMG vehicles

X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display.

Z

150


The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics.

E Economy

S Sport

Comfortable, economical driving

Sporty driving style i For further information on the automatic drive program, see ( Y page 150).

i The automatic transmission shifts to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started.

AMG vehicles

i For further information on the automatic drive program, see ( Y page 150).

Only change from automatic drive program C,

S or S+ to manual drive program M when the vehicle is stationary.

i The automatic transmission shifts to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started.

i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE

START, see ( Y page 179).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

Drive program selector with manual drive program

X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer.

The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red.

C Controlled

Efficiency

Comfortable, economical driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style

M Manual

RS RACE

START

Manual gear shifting

Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill

:

;

Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

In the automatic drive program, you can restrict or expand the shift range by using the steering wheel paddle shifters ( Y page 151).

i You can only change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D.

Automatic drive program

Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:

R comfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings

R optimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner


151

R the vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully

R increased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example

R the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ on

AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:

R sporty engine and automatic transmission settings

R the vehicle pulling away in first gear

R the automatic transmission shifting up later

R the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points

Shift ranges

Introduction

i On AMG vehicles and vehicles with

steering wheel paddle shifters, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or expand the shift range ( Y page 151).

The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear.

Shift range:

= You can use the engine's braking effect.

5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving:

R on steep mountain roads

R in mountainous terrain

R in arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches

Restricting the shift range

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up, even if the shift range is restricted. This prevents the engine from overrevving.

Derestricting the shift range

X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

The shift range is derestricted.

Z

152


Clearing the shift range restriction

X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until D is shown again in the multifunction display.

The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D.

reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.

Selecting the ideal shift range

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in position.

The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears.

Manual drive program

Switching on the manual drive program

X Turn the drive program selector

( Y page 150) until M appears in the multifunction display.

The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red.

The manual drive program is only available for

AMG vehicles.

Manual drive program M is different from drive programs S and S+ with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes.

Manual drive program M can be selected using the drive program selector. In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. The gear currently selected and engaged is shown in the multifunction display.

:

;

Gear indicator

Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.

Downshifting

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the lefthand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed.

Upshifting

! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is

Kickdown

i Kickdown is not possible in manual drive program M.

Switching off the manual drive program

X Turn the drive program selector

( Y page 150) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display.


153

Z

154

Refueling

Problems with the transmission

Problem

The transmission has problems shifting gear.


The transmission is losing oil.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability is deteriorating.

The transmission no longer changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.

It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the transmission to position P.

Switch off the engine.

X

X

X

Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.

Shift the transmission to position D or R.

If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Refueling


G WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.

It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.

Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline.

Turn off the engine before refueling.

Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact.

Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health.

G WARNING

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gasoline to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and engine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines.

Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.

Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

Further information on fuel and on fuel grades can be found in the "Fuel" section

( Y page 366).

Refueling

155

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

:

;

=

?

To open the fuel filler flap

To insert the fuel filler cap

Tire pressure table

Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-

GO.

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed

8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening

X

X


Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.

This corresponds to key position 0:

"SmartKey removed".

The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :.

The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X

X

Open the fuel filler flap fully.

Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it.

X insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing

X

X

Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.

i The 8 reserve fuel light flashes if you are driving with the fuel filler cap open. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. A message appears in the multifunction display ( Y page 242).

For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see ( Y page 264).

Fuel filler flap emergency release

X open the trunk lid.

X

X

Slide down the parcel net.

Open the right-hand side trim panel.

Z

156

Refueling

X

X

X

X

Remove the first-aid kit ( Y page 312).

Detach the emergency release from retainer :.

Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;.

The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

Open the fuel filler flap.

Parking

157

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.


G Risk of explosion or fire

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

X

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately ( Y page 139).

Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.


The fuel filler flap cannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

or

The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X

X

X

Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key ( Y page 76).

Open the trunk lid or the tailgate.

open the trunk lid.

X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release

( Y page 155).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.


Parking


G WARNING

If flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they could ignite. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

R releasing the parking brake

R shifting the automatic transmission out of the parking position P

R starting the engine.

They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury.


SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Z

158

Parking

! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to the vehicle or damage to the drive train.

Switching off the engine


G WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

X

X

Apply the parking brake firmly.

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position P.

Using KEYLESS-GO

X Press the Start/Stop button ( Y page 139).

The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, it corresponds to

SmartKey position 0 or "SmartKey removed".

i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P.

i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently from the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button

X AMG vehicles: press P button :.

Using the SmartKey

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

i If you turn off the engine with the

SmartKey and then remove it from the ignition lock or open a front door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.

Parking brake

G WARNING

If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again.

G WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

R releasing the parking brake

R shifting the automatic transmission out of the parking position P

R starting the engine.

Driving tips

159

They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury.


SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the brake lamps will not light up.

X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.

When the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

X

X

To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Pull release handle :.

When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or

J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster.

Driving tips

General notes


G WARNING

Always remember that you must concentrate primarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's concentration must always be directed primarily at road traffic. For your own safety and that of others, we recommend that you stop the vehicle at a safe place and in accordance with the traffic conditions before making or accepting a phone call.

Comply with all legal requirements if you use the telephone while driving. Use the handsfree system and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. In some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for drivers to use mobile phones while driving.

Only operate the audio system or COMAND

(Cockpit Management and Data System) in compliance with all legal requirements and when the road, weather and traffic conditions permit. You may otherwise not be able to observe the traffic conditions, endangering yourself and others.

Remember that your vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second when it is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately

50 km/h).

Parking the vehicle for a long period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.

i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive sensibly – save fuel

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.

X

X

X

Remove unnecessary loads.

Remove roof racks when they are not needed.

Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.

X

X

Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.

Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the

Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display.

Z

160

Driving tips

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic and in mountainous terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Pedals

G WARNING

Make sure absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals' range of movement.

Keep the driver's footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

Exhaust check

G WARNING

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.

If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Only have work on the engine carried out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.

The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

Rolling with the engine switched off

G WARNING

There is no power assistance for the steering and the brake when the engine is not running.

Steering and braking requires significantly more effort and you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.

Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is in motion.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display gives you information on how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the optimum driving style in terms of consumption, taking the actual and selected conditions into consideration. Your driving style can

Driving tips

161 significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.

The ECO display consists of three bars:

R

Acceleration

R Constant

R

Coasting

The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style.

The ECO display does not provide any information on the actual consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption figure in l/100 km.

Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:

R Load

R

Tire pressure

R Cold start

R

Choice of route

R Electrical consumers switched on

These factors are not taken into consideration by the ECO display.

The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories:

Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration)

The bar fills up:

Moderate acceleration, especially at high speeds

The bar empties:

Sporty acceleration

Constant (evaluation of driving style at any time)


Constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration


Speed variations

Coasting (evaluation of total deceleration)


Drive with care and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal in good time: the vehicle can coast without braking


Frequent braking i An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds.

Achieving a higher value in the categories

"Acceleration" and "Constant":

R observe the gearshift recommendations.

R drive in drive program E.

i On longer journeys, e.g. on highways, the only the bar in the "Constant" category changes.

i The ECO display calculates the driving style from the start of the journey to the end. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the journey.

On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display

( Y page 213).

Z

162

Driving tips

Braking


G WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water.

You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes.

When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Limited braking performance on salttreated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.

R

Brake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so.

R

Carefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey.

R

Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.

Servicing the brakes

G WARNING

If brake pads or brake fluid other than those recommended are used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

G WARNING

Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when you apply the brakes.

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a

Driving tips

163 warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low.

Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display.

The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planning to have the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP ® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition must be switched off

(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or

1) while the parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer.

Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP ® system.

may seriously damage the brake

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP ® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition system must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when:

R testing the parking brake on a brake dynamometer.

R you intend to have the vehicle towed with one of the axles raised.

Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP ® may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads.

You can find a description of Brake Assist

(BAS) on ( Y page 64) or of BAS PLUS on

( Y page 65).

AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes

The high-performance brake system is installed only on the CLS 63 AMG.

The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on:

R speed

R braking force

R environmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your authorized


New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving.

Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. For

Z

164

Driving tips high-performance driving in particular, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:

R you drive at low speeds.

R the tires have adequate tread depth.

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner:

R lower your speed.

R avoid ruts.

R brake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment.

This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving


G WARNING




G DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section ( Y page 328).

Driving with summer tires

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section ( Y page 328).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNING




G WARNING

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed:

X Shift the transmission to position N.

Driving systems

165

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

i For more information on driving with snow chains, see ( Y page 329).

which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph

(30 km/h).

Cruise control lever

Driving systems

Cruise control


G WARNING

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle's speed and for safe brake operation.

Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.

R

The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

R

The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

R

Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog.

The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

:

;

=

?

To activate or increase speed

To activate or reduce speed

To deactivate cruise control

To activate at the current speed/last stored speed

When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up.

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range

1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine,

Activation conditions

To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled:

R the parking brake must be released.

R you are driving faster than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

R ESP ® must be active, but not intervening.

R the transmission must be in position D.

Z

166

Driving systems

Storing and maintaining the current speed

You can adopt the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :.


The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed

G WARNING

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.

Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others.

Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed

G WARNING

The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

Driving systems

167

X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

X

X

To adjust the set speed in 1 mph

increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the point of resistance.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the point of resistance.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

R you depress the parking brake.

R you are driving at less than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

R ESP ® intervenes or you deactivate ESP ® .

R you shift the transmission to position N while driving.

R you shift the transmission to position N while driving.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise

Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

There are several ways to deactivate cruise control:

X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.

or

X Brake.

DISTRONIC PLUS


G WARNING

The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system.

G WARNING

The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care.

The responsibility for the vehicle's speed, distance to the preceding vehicle and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe stopping distance, always remains with the driver.

The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.

Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This

Z

168

Driving systems could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS distance is not a substitute for the active intervention of the driver. It does not detect pedestrians or stationary objects, nor can it detect, recognize or predict the road's course or the movements of vehicles in front. DISTRONIC PLUS can only brake the vehicle using 40% of the vehicle's maximum available brake force.

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle, especially if the vehicles are not driving on the middle of their lane.

The driver must always pay careful attention to the road, weather and traffic conditions.

The driver must drive, steer and brake in a manner which will allow him to always have control of the vehicle.

Sources of high-frequency radio waves, such as toll stations, speed-measuring radar, etc., can cause DISTRONIC PLUS to fail temporarily.

G WARNING

The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and traffic conditions into account. Only use the

DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.

G WARNING

Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.

G WARNING

The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off the

DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if:

R roads are slippery or covered with snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and the vehicle could skid.

R the DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers are dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance control system functionality could be impaired.

Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late. This could cause an accident in which you and/or others could be injured.

G WARNING

The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

G WARNING

Your undivided attention to street and traffic conditions is necessary at all times whether

DISTRONIC PLUS is active or not.

The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationary objects on the road (for example, a vehicle stopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle).

DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react to oncoming vehicles.

Driving systems

169

Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:

R when changing to the right lane, if the vehicles in the left lane are driving slower

R when driving into a filter lane or an expressway exit

R in complex driving situations, for example in construction sites on an expressway

In these situations DISTRONIC PLUS will maintain the set speed if it is not deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only for maintaining a set speed and a set distance from the objects moving in front of the vehicle.

G WARNING

An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp · in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle's current speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision.

Immediately brake the vehicle to increase your distance to the preceding vehicle. The warning sound is intended as a final caution in which you should intercede with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking. This will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided.

Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s 2 (4 m/s 2 ).

This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum braking force.

To avoid a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle just enough to restore the preset speed or the preset distance to the vehicle in front.

G WARNING

If you do not receive visual or acoustic warning signals during a critical traffic situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not recognized the collision risk, has been deactivated or is malfunctioning.

Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers responsibility to apply the brakes in order to control the vehicle and avoid a collision.

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front.

If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated

( Y page 223) and operational.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC

PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 20 mph

(Canada: 30 km/h) and120 mph (Canada:

200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in the speed range between

0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:

200 km/h).

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients.

As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.

i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar

Z

170

Driving systems sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.







Cruise control lever

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS


G WARNING

The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC

PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing).


In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

R the engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.

R the parking brake must be released.

R ESP ® must be active, but not intervening.

R the transmission must be in position D.

R the hood must be closed.

R the driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened.

R the front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed.

R the vehicle must not skid.

Activating while driving

:

;

=

?

A

To store the current speed or a higher speed

To store the current speed or a lower speed

To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

To store the current speed or calling up the last stored speed

To set the specified minimum distance

Driving systems

171

X

X

X

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;.

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ; until the desired speed is set.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.

When driving at speeds below 20 mph

(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tone sounds.

i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slowermoving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;.

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ; until the desired speed is set.

If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 20 mph (30km/h) if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the

DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated

( Y page 217).

i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance ( Y page 174).

Pulling away and driving

G WARNING

When you step on the brake pedal, you switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS except when the vehicle is at a standstill. The DISTRONIC PLUS will no longer brake your vehicle. You are always responsible for maintaining a distance from other vehicles, observing road speeds and braking well in advance.

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;.

or

X Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC

PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving faster, it accelerates your vehicle, but only up to the speed you have stored.

Changing lanes

G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids designed to assist driving.

They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings.

Z

172

Driving systems

Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC

PLUS supports you when:

R you are driving faster than 40mph

(60 km/h).

R

DISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front.

R you switch on the appropriate turn signal.

R DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision.

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles.

Vehicles with COMAND i The following function is not operational in all countries.

DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can react appropriately to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:

R approach or drive through a traffic circle

R approach a T-intersection

R turn off at a freeway exit

Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system.

Example: traffic circle

The current speed is maintained:

R approximately ten seconds before the traffic circle/T-intersection and for approximately 1.5seconds when driving on the traffic circle

R approximately twelve seconds before reaching a freeway exit and approximately four seconds after the freeway exit

Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the set speed you specified.

Stopping

G WARNING

Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC

PLUS is activated.

DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle.

DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking.

The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is canceled and the vehicle can start moving if:

R DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever.

R you accelerate.

R there is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g.

battery failure.

R the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with.

R the battery is disconnected.

Driving systems

173

If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary.

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake.

i Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if:

R the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.

R the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

R the hood is opened.

R a system malfunction occurs.

R the power supply is not sufficient.

Setting a speed

G WARNING

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.

Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others.

:

;

=

?

A

To store the current speed or a higher speed

To store the current speed or a lower speed

To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

To store the current speed or calling up the last stored speed

To set the specified minimum distance

X

X

Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

To adjust the set speed in 1 mph

increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the point of resistance.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the point of resistance.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Z

174

Driving systems

Storing the current speed or calling up a stored speed

G WARNING

The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :.


DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value.

Setting the specified minimum distance

G WARNING

It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver's preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.

You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display

( Y page 175).

X To increase: turn control ; in direction

=.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front.

Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer

Driving systems

175

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display

General notes

You can select the distance display in the

Assistance menu ( Y page 217)of the onboard computer.

:

;

=

?

A

Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE ® Brake

Vehicle in front, if detected

Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front

Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable

Own vehicle

X Select the Distance Display function using the on-board computer

( Y page 217).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated

:

;

=

?

DISTRONIC PLUS activated

Own vehicle

Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable

Vehicle in front, if detected

You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Z

176

Driving systems

X Select the Distance Display function using the on-board computer

( Y page 217).

i You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC

PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releases the brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to a speed below 20 mph (30km/h) by the system, provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle directly in front. At this point, the driver must apply the brakes in order to slow down further and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if:

R you engage the parking brake.

R you are driving slower than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected.

R ESP ® intervenes or you deactivate ESP ® .

R the transmission is in the P, R or N position.

R you switch off the radar sensor system

( Y page 223).

R you pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open.

R the vehicle has skidded.

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the

DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

There are several ways to deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS:

X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.

or

X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS


G WARNING

The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g.

following another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance).

This means that:

R Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you have changed lanes.

R While in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC

PLUS could lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed.

Driving systems

177

The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it. It may not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:

R a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam

R a disabled vehicle

R an oncoming vehicle

The driver must always be alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle.

G WARNING

The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions.

The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road,

Z

178

Driving systems because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,

DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

HOLD function

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations:

R when pulling away, especially on steep slopes

R when maneuvering on steep slopes

R when waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.


You can activate the HOLD function if:

R the vehicle is stationary.

R the engine is running.

R the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened.

R the parking brake is released.

R the hood is closed.

R the transmission is in position D, R or N.

R

DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING

The vehicle's brakes are applied when the

HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing).

X

X

X Make sure that the activation conditions are met.

Depress the brake pedal.

Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ë appears in the multifunction display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

Driving systems

179 i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

G WARNING

Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated.

The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle.

The HOLD function does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking.

The braking effect of the HOLD function is canceled and the vehicle could roll away if:

R the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

R there is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g.

battery failure.

R the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with.

R the battery is disconnected.

If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:

R you accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R.

R you shift the transmission to position P.

R you depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display.

R you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if:

R the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.

R the engine is switched off.

R the hood is opened.

R a system malfunction occurs.

R the power supply is not sufficient.

RACE START


G WARNING

RACE START is only available when SPORT handling mode is activated. SPORT handling mode only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited extent in the event of swerving or wheelspin.

RACE START should only be used on specially designated roads. Always adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface.

Conditions for activation

You can activate RACE START if:

R the doors are closed.

R the engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately

176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing.

R

SPORT handling mode is activated.

( Y page 67)

R the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

Z

180

Driving systems

R the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot).

R the transmission is in position D.

Activating RACE START

X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector clockwise

( Y page 149) until the RS lamp lights up.

The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP

Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display.

i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The

RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle shifter ( Y page 150).

or

X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel paddle shifter ( Y page 150).

The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal message appears in the multifunction display.

i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE

START is canceled. The RACE START Not

Possible See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

The engine speed rises to approximately

3500 rpm.

The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display.

i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.

The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph

(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated.

RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during

RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE

START Not Possible See Operator's

Manual message appears in the multifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a short period of time, it is only available again after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance.

AIRMATIC

Vehicle level


Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.

When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption.

The following vehicle levels are possible:

R normal

R raised: the vehicle is raised by about

0.80 in (20 mm) when compared with the normal level

R lowered: the vehicle is lowered by about

0.40 in (10 mm) when compared with the normal level

Driving systems

181 i These changes in level are so slight that you are hardly aware of them.

The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually.

The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically:

R at speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)

R if you have selected "Sports tuning"

( Y page 181)

Setting the vehicle level

G WARNING

To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.

Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Setting raised level

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:

R drive at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h)

R drive for about three minutes at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).

The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal level

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is lit:

X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.


General notes

The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:

R your driving style, e.g. sporty

R the road surface condition, e.g. bumps

R your individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is not lit:

X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level.

The Vehicle Rising message appears in the display.

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road.

Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

Z

182

Driving systems

X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected.

The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort tuning

In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable.

Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway.

X Press button :.

Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning is selected.

The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:

R your driving style, e.g. sporty

R the road surface condition, e.g. bumps

R your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort

If you select Sport or Sport + mode and restart the engine, the suspension setting reverts to Comfort mode.

Sport mode

AMG adaptive sport suspension system

General notes

i AMG adaptive sport suspension system is available for the CLS 63 AMG model.

Rear axle level control

The vehicle automatically sets the vehicle level at the rear axle. Rear axle level control ensures the best possible suspension and that the ground clearance remains constant even when the vehicle is loaded. This improves driving safety and fuel consumption.


General notes

The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.

:

;

=

?

Mode selector button

Button for storing, calling up and displaying the selected mode

Sport + mode indicator lamp

Sport mode indicator lamp

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road.

Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

X Press the : button once.

Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected Sport mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

Sport + mode

The very firm setting of the suspension tuning in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits.

Driving systems

183

If indicator lamps = and ? are off:

X Press button : twice.

Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You have selected Sport + mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp ? lights up:

X Press the : button once.

Second indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport + mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort mode

In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable.

Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway.

X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ? go out.

You have selected Comfort mode.

The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

Storing and calling up settings

Once the suspension tuning and drive program have been selected, you can store and call up your settings using AMG button ;.

X To store: press AMG button ; until you hear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button ;.

The stored suspension tuning and drive program are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button ;.

Your selection appears in the multifunction display.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

G WARNING

If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient traction:

R While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

R While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.

R Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

4MATIC cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case.

Damage of this sort is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP ® improves the traction of your vehicle

, it whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.

PARKTRONIC


G WARNING

The PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system.

It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always remains with the driver.

Z

184

Driving systems

G WARNING

Make sure no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking/ maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be injured.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:

R switch on the ignition

R shift the transmission to position D, R or N

R release the parking brake

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above

11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

:

Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them

( Y page 307).

Range of the sensors

General notes

! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars.

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects.

The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause

PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.

Example: side view

Example: top view

Driving systems

185

Front sensors

Center

Corners

Approx. 40in (approx.

100cm)


60cm)

Rear sensors

Center

Corners


120cm)


80cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Transmission position

D

R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards

P

Warning display

Front area activated

Rear and front areas activated

No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:

R sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.

R seventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Warning displays

The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents.

The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment.

The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up.

:

;

Indicator lamp

To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Z

186

Driving systems

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit.

You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.

PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately

20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the

PARKTRONIC button lights up.


PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.

X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit.

PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately

20 seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.

X

X

Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors ( Y page 307).

Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.

X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist


G WARNING

Active Parking Assist is merely an aid and may sometimes recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. For example, these might be spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc.

Active Parking Assist measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. For instance, this may be the case when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space.

Active Parking Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. If you rely solely on Active Parking Assist, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering.

G WARNING

Objects located above the height range of

Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active

Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Active Parking Assist in such situations.

Driving systems

187

G WARNING

The front of the vehicle will veer out in the direction of the oncoming traffic during the parking operation. In some cases, the vehicle will also take you onto sections of the oncoming lane during the parking procedure.

You are responsible for safety at all times and must pay attention to any road users approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.

G WARNING

Make sure no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking/ maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be injured.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle.

A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC ( Y page 183). When

PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking

Assist is also unavailable.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:

R that are parallel to the direction of travel

R that are on straight roads, not bends

R that are on the same level as the road, e.g.

not on the pavement

Parking tips:

R on narrow roads, drive past the parking space as close as possible.

R parking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all.

R snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately.

R pay attention to the PARKTRONIC

( Y page 185) warning messages during the parking procedure.

R you can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking

Assist will then be canceled.

R when transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use

Active Parking Assist.

R when snow chains or an emergency spare wheel are mounted, you should not use

Active Parking Assist here either.

R make sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.

R the way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active

Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should abort the parking procedure with Active

Parking Assist.

R you can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space.

Should the gear change occur too soon to achieve a sensible parking position, the parking procedure will be aborted.

Z

188

Driving systems

Detecting a parking space

Example: detected parking space

:

Detected parking space on the left

;

Parking symbol

= Detected parking space on the right

Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below

19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on. This must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.

When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears.

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces:

R that are parallel to the direction of travel

R that are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

R that are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle

A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNING

PARKTRONIC and Active Parking Assist are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention.

You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.

G WARNING

When parking, you need to make sure that no obstacles are located in the vicinity of the vehicle during the entire operation. Active

Parking Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. It merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering.

To stop the vehicle or avoid an accident you need to apply the brakes yourself.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

X

X

Shift the transmission to position R.

The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:

% message appears in the multifunction display.

To cancel the procedure: press the

% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or

X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

X

X

Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.

Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. Drive at a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or slower

Driving systems

189 when backing up. Otherwise, Active

Parking Assist will be deactivated.

i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before.

Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D

Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary.

Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction.

The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

X

X

Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times.

Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist Active Select R

Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

Further transmission shifts may be necessary.

As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display. PARKTRONIC continues to be available.

X Maneuver if necessary.

X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC ( Y page 185).

Canceling Active Parking Assist

You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time.

X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself.

Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

or

X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center console ( Y page 185).

PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active

Parking Assist is immediately canceled.

The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if:

R the transmission is shifted too early.

R parking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible.

R you are driving faster than 6mph

(10 km/h).

R a wheel spins, ESP ® intervenes or fails. The

ä warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist Canceled message.

When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer again yourself.

Rear view camera


G WARNING

Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they could be injured.

Z

190

Driving systems

General notes

Rear view camera : is an optical parking aid.

It shows the area behind your vehicle in the

COMAND display.

Rear view camera : is located in the handle strip of the tailgate.

View through the camera

G WARNING

The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles

R from a distorted perspective

R inaccurately

R may not display obstacles at all

The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cautious. Take care and pay careful attention. The rear view camera may not show objects which are

R very close to the rear bumper

R under the rear bumper

R above the tailgate handle

You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This includes the area behind, in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise you could endanger yourself and/or others.

G WARNING

The rear view camera will not function or will not fully function if:

R the tailgate is open

R it is raining or snowing strongly or if it is foggy

R it is night or if you are parking/ maneuvering your vehicle in a very dark area

R a very bright white light is affecting the camera

R the immediate vicinity is illuminated with fluorescent light (the display can flicker)

R temperature changes abruptly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage (condensation on the lens)

R the camera lens is dirty or covered

R the rear of your vehicle is damaged

In this case, have the position and the setting of the camera checked at a specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you consult a Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose.

Do not use the rear view camera in these situations. You could otherwise injure yourself and other people and/or cause damage - including damage to your vehicle while parking/maneuvering.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

Activating the rear view camera

X

X

X



Make sure that the rear view camera function is selected in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions for

COMAND).

Engage reverse gear.

The area behind the vehicle is shown in the

COMAND display with guide lines.

Driving systems

191

Guide lines in the COMAND display

G WARNING

Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if you are color-blind or have impaired color vision.

Only use rear view camera if you can see and distinguish all colored guidelines shown by rear view camera on the COMAND system display.

G WARNING

Please note that objects that do not touch the ground may appear to be further away than they actually are, for example:

R the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you

R the trailer drawbar

R the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

R the rear end of a truck

R a slanted post

In such cases, you should not use the guide lines to judge the distance. You may misjudge the distance, which increases the risk of impacting the objects.

Even if the object you approach is directly on the ground, do not approach the object any closer than the red guide line.

ground level. Blue guide lines : depict the width required for the vehicle. They are used to align the vehicle with the edge of the road, e.g. the curb.

ATTENTION ASSIST


G WARNING

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.

Fatigue may cause you to recognize hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react more slowly. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Make sure that you take regular breaks in time, particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

Example: information in the COMAND display

Guide lines ; and = show the approximate distance to the rear area. Yellow guide line ; indicates a distance of approximately

3 ft (1 m) and red guide line = indicates a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m). The distances only apply to objects that are at

General notes

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on freeways and interstate highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and

112 mph (180 km/h).

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account:

R your personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics

R driving conditions, e.g. time, driving time

Z

192

Driving systems

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all:

R if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes

R if there is a strong side wind

R if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration

R if you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than

112 mph (180 km/h)

R if you are currently using COMAND or making a telephone call with it

R if the time has been set incorrectly

R in active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precondition for this is that

ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if:

R you switch off the engine.

R you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break.

Warning and display messages in the multifunction display

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the

Attention Assist: Drowsiness

Detected message appears in the multifunction display.

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer ( Y page 218).

Symbol : appears in the multifunction display.

X

X

If necessary, take a break.

Press the a button to confirm the message.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again

Night View Assist Plus


G WARNING

Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely solely on the

Night View Assist Plus display. Continue to look through the windshield. You are responsible for safety and must drive in accordance with traffic conditions. You could otherwise put yourself and others in danger.

The system may be impaired or unavailable if:

R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or heavy spray.

R the windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera.

R you are driving on bends, uphill gradients or downhill gradients.

G WARNING

The Night View Assist Plus cannot record objects immediately in front of or next to the vehicle. When maneuvering, continue to look through the windshield. Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them.

Driving systems

193

R the light switch is in the Ã or L position.

R reverse gear has not been engaged.

Switching on Night View Assist Plus

In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road.

Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in COMAND. The image displayed in

COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by highbeam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time.

If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognized by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display.

Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist

Plus display in the multifunction display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the high-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic.

i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Night

View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic.

Switching on Night View Assist Plus


You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if:

R the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

R it is dark.

X

X

Make sure that COMAND is switched on.

Press button :.

The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the COMAND display.

You can read about how to adjust the brightness of the COMAND display in the

COMAND operating instructions.

i The infrared lamps switch on automatically from a speed of about

6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do not have the full visual range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working.

Pedestrian recognition

G WARNING

Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative if:

R pedestrians are partially or entirely obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles.

R the silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night

View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections.

Z

194

Driving systems

R pedestrians do not contrast with the surroundings.

R pedestrians are not standing upright, for example, if they are sitting, crouching or lying down.

:

;

=

?

Night View Assist Plus display

Pedestrian recognized

Framing

Symbol for active pedestrian recognition i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian recognition.

Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a silhouette in the shape of a person.

Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if:

R

Night View Assist Plus is activated.

R you are driving faster than 6 mph

(10 km/h).

R the surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting.

If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ? appears. If a pedestrian is now recognized, they are framed = and thereby highlighted. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen.

It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians.

Fogged up or dirty windshield

G WARNING

Always remember that you must concentrate primarily on driving the vehicle. A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others: stop the vehicle before attempting to clean fogged up windows or the windshield area in front of the

Night View Assist Plus camera.

Please remember that when your vehicle is traveling at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h) it covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.

If the windshield in front of the camera is fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the

Night View Assist Plus display is affected.

X

X

To defrost: check the automatic air conditioning settings ( Y page 132) and fold down the camera cover ( Y page 308).

To defrost the inside of the windshield: fold down the camera cover ( Y page 308) and clean the windshield ( Y page 306).

Driving systems

195

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem

The picture quality of

Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated.


The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.

X Replace the wiper blades ( Y page 121).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash.

X Clean the windshield ( Y page 306).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windshield.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.

X Defrost the windshield ( Y page 132).

The windshield is iced up.

X De-ice the windshield ( Y page 131).

There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.

X Clean the inside of the windshield ( Y page 306).

Lane Tracking package

General notes

The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind

Spot Assist ( Y page 195) and Lane Keeping

Assist ( Y page 197).

Blind Spot Assist


G WARNING

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving.

Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late.

Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all.

Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the



Z

196

Driving systems

General notes

Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes.

For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated ( Y page 223) and operational.

Monitoring range of the sensors

G WARNING

Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning.

If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation.

This may be the case if vehicles are driving at that edge of their lane which is furthest away from your vehicle.


The Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to

3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:

R warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.

R warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly.

Driving systems

197

Indicator and warning display

G WARNING

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.


Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that the radar sensor system

( Y page 223) and Blind Spot Assist

( Y page 219) are activated in the on-board computer.


Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately

1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

:

Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).

At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above

20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot

Assist is no longer active.

The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.

Lane Keeping Assist


G WARNING

Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray.

R there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.


R several or no lane markings for a single lane are present.

R the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.

R the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected.

Z

198

Driving systems

R the lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks.

R the lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.

R the road is narrow and winding.

Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera : at the top of the windshield. Lane

Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally.

If you have selected km as the display unit in the Display Unit Speed-/

Odometer ( Y page 220) function in the onboard computer, Lane Keeping Assist assists you at speeds above 60 km/h. If miles is selected as the display unit, the assistance range starts at 40 mph.

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select

Standard or Adaptive ( Y page 219).


If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, symbol : is highlighted in green. Lane

Keeping Assist is ready for use.

Standard

If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

R you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.

R a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP ® .

Adaptive

If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

R you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.

R a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.


R you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

R you brake hard.

R you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly.

R you cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the

Driving systems

199 lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

R you approach the outer lane marking on a bend.

R the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway.

R the system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

R the road has narrow lanes.

R you cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notes

The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS ( Y page 167),

Active Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 199) and

Active Lane Keeping Assist ( Y page 203).

Active Blind Spot Assist


G WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all.


R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray.

R the rear and/or front sensors are dirty.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles that are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area.

Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the









General notes

Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle which are in back of the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you

Z

200

Driving systems avoid a collision. To support the coursecorrecting brake application, Active Blind

Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. The free space in the direction of travel is then evaluated.

Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated ( Y page 223) and operational.

Monitoring area

G WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.

Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course.

If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation.

This may be the case if vehicles are driving at that edge of their lane which is furthest away from your vehicle.


Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot

Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane.

Due to the nature of the system:

R warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.

R warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.

The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.

Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Driving systems

201

Indicator and warning display

G WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 20 mph (30km/h). The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.


: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to

20 mph(30km/h). At speeds above 20 mph

(30km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and

Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above

20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always given when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind

Spot Assist is no longer active.

The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.

Visual and audible collision warnings

If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application

G WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. In some cases, the course-correcting brake application is not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case, you must steer, brake or accelerate.

In very rare cases, the system may erroneously detect a danger of collision in the area of crash barriers or similar lane borders and apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

You are responsible for driving at appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

Z

202

Driving systems

R ESP ® is switched off.

R a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that the radar sensor system

( Y page 223) and Active Blind Spot Assist

( Y page 219) are activated in the on-board computer.


Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately

1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, the message shown in the illustration appears in the multifunction display.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph

(30 km/h) and120 mph (200km/h).

Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if:

R there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.

R a vehicle approaches you too closely at the side.

R you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.

R you clearly brake or accelerate.


ESP ® or PRE-SAFE ® Brake.

Active Lane Keeping Assist


G WARNING

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all.


R there is poor visibility, e.g. due to inadequate illumination of the road surface, snow, rain, fog or spray.

R there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.


R several or no lane markings for a single lane are present.

R the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.

R the distance to the vehicle in front is too small, and as a result the lane markings cannot be recognized.

R the lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks.

Driving systems

203

R the lane markings change quickly, e.g.

branch off, cross or merge.

R the road is narrow and winding.

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera : at the top of the windshield. Active

Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane.

If you have selected km as the display unit in the Display Unit Speed-/

Odometer ( Y page 220) function in the onboard computer, Active Lane Keeping Assist assists you at speeds above 60 km/h. If miles is selected as the display unit, the assistance range starts at 40 mph.

Warning vibration in the steering wheel

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

R you approach the outer lane marking on a bend.

R the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway.

R the system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

R the road has narrow lanes.

R you cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake application

G WARNING

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. In some cases, the lanecorrecting brake application is not sufficient to bring your vehicle back to the original lane.

In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane.

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. In rare cases, unclear markings or particular structures on the roadway can be recognized as solid lane markings. An inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking, may be interrupted at any time by steering slightly in the opposite direction.

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account.

You are responsible for the driving at appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving

Z

204

Driving systems style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

The message shown in the illustration appears in the multifunction display when a lane-correcting brake application occurs.

If you leave your lane under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

This function is available in the range between

40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and

200 km/h).

A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.

In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed.

i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:

R you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.


R you have switched on the turn signals.


ESP ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake or Active Blind

Spot Assist.

R you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.

R ESP ® is switched off.

R the transmission is not in position D.

R a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed.

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic situations or road users. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you:

R steer slightly in the opposite direction.

R use a turn signal.

R clearly brake or accelerate.

A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:


ESP ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake or Active Blind

Spot Assist.

R lane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist




If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, symbol : is highlighted in green. Active

Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.


R you have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.

R a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP ® .






R you brake hard.






If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, symbol : is highlighted. Active Lane

Keeping Assist is ready for use.



R a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP ® .






R you brake hard.



Driving systems

205

Z

206


Important safety notes .................... 208

Displays and controls ....................... 209

Menus and submenus ...................... 212

Display messages ............................. 228

Warning and indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster ............................ 255

207

208






G WARNING

The driver's concentration must always be directed primarily at road traffic.

For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second.

G WARNING

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as

R speed

R outside temperature

R warning/indicator lamps

R malfunction/warning messages

R failure of any systems

Driving characteristics may be impaired.

If you must continue to drive, do so with added caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNING

Malfunction and warning messages are only displayed for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems. They do not replace the owner's and/or driver's responsibility to maintain the vehicle's operating safety. Have all required maintenance services and safety checks performed on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages.

G WARNING

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

For an illustration of the instrument cluster, see ( Y page 29).

Displays and controls



209

:

;

=

?

A

Speedometer with segments ( Y page 210)

Multifunction display ( Y page 211)

Tachometer ( Y page 209)

Coolant temperature ( Y page 209)

Fuel gauge

Coolant temperature display

G WARNING

Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high.

If the coolant temperature is over

248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side

( Y page 29).

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Z

210


Outside temperature display

G WARNING

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display ( Y page 211).

Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available.

R Cruise control activated ( Y page 165):

The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed.

R

DISTRONIC PLUS activated ( Y page 167):

One or two segments in the set speed range light up.

R DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.

:

;

=

?

A

Multifunction display

Right control panel

Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions

Back button

Left control panel

X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.


211

Left control panel

=

;

R Calls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:

R

Scrolls in lists

R

Selects a submenu or function

R

In the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene

R In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number

9

:

Press and hold:

R

In the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling

R In the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open a R

Confirms a selection/display message

R

In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number

R

In the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station

Right control panel

~ R

Rejects or ends a call

R

Exits phone book/redial memory

6 R Makes or accepts a call

R

Switches to the redial memory

W

X

R Adjusts the volume

8 R

Mute

Back button

% Press briefly:

R

Back

R

Switches off the Voice Control

System; see the separate operating instructions

R

Hides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used

R

Exits the telephone book/redial memory

% Press and hold:

R

Calls up the standard display in the Trip menu

Multifunction display

:

;

=

?

A

Description field

Menu bar

Drive program ( Y page 147)

Transmission position ( Y page 146)

Permanent display: outside temperature or speed ( Y page 220)

X To show menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.

Z

212

Menus and submenus

Text field : shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages.

The following messages may appear in the multifunction display:

XjY Active Parking Assist ( Y page 186)

CRUISE Cruise control ( Y page 165)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

( Y page 116)

À ATTENTION ASSIST ( Y page 191)

¤ ECO start/stop function

( Y page 142)

Ã Lane Keeping Assist ( Y page 197)

Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist

( Y page 202)

ë HOLD function ( Y page 178)

Ä PRE-SAFE ® Brake ( Y page 69)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; is shown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Reset"


Menu overview

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.

Operating the on-board computer

( Y page 210).

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:

R

Trip menu ( Y page 212)

R

Navi menu (navigation instructions)

( Y page 214)

R

Audio menu ( Y page 215)

R

Tel menu (telephone) ( Y page 216)

R

DriveAssist menu (assistance)

( Y page 217)

R

Serv.

menu ( Y page 219)

R

Sett.

menu ( Y page 219)

R

AMG menu in AMG vehicles ( Y page 224)

Example: trip computer "From Start"

: Distance

;

=

?

Time

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

Press 9 or : to select From Start or From Reset .

The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset ( Y page 213).

The From Start trip computer is automatically reset when:

R

The ignition has been switched off for more than four hours.

R

999 hours have been exceeded.

R 9,999 miles have been exceeded.

The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds

9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

ECO display


213

Digital speedometer

Example: ECO display

X

X


Select ECO DISPLAY with 9 or :.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.

Further information on the ECO display

( Y page 160).

:

Digital speedometer

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer.

Resetting values

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to select the current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range.

The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refueled C instead of the range.

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

X

X

X


Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset.

Press the a button.

X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following functions:

R trip odometer

R

"From Start" trip computer

R

"From Reset" trip computer

R

ECO display i When you reset the values in the "ECO display", the values in the trip computer

"From start" are likewise reset. When you reset the values in the trip computer "From start", the values in the "ECO display"are likewise reset.

Z

214


Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions

In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information on navigation, see the separate operating instructions.

X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

:

;

Direction of travel

Current street

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation

:

;

=

Road into which the change of direction leads

Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

Change-of-direction icon

When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction =. This shortens from the bottom to the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

:

;

=

?

Distance to the destination

Distance to the next change of direction

Current street

Symbol "follow the road's course"

:

;

=

?

A

B

Road into which the change of direction leads

Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

Lane recommendation

Uninterrupted lane

New lane during a change of direction

Change-of-direction icon

On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation = for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed.

Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map.


215

Other status indicators of the navigation system

R O: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.

R

New Route...

or Calculating Route : calculating a new route

R

Off Map or Off Mapped Road : the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position).

R

No Route : no route could be calculated to the selected destination.

i For information on switching waveband and storing stations; see the separate operating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio.

For more information on satellite radio operation, see the separate operating instructions.

Operating audio player or audio media

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

:

;

Waveband

Station frequency with memory position i Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored.

X

X

X

Switch on the audio system or COMAND and select Radio; see the separate operating instructions.

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.

To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a station from the station

list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button.

If no station list is received:

X To select a station using the station

search: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button.

Display CD/DVD changer (example)

:

Current title

Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.

X

X

X

Switch on COMAND and activate audio

CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions.


To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a track from the track list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the

9 or : button until desired track : has been reached.

If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.

If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track.

The current track does not appear in audio

AUX mode ( Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Z

216


Video DVD operation

Display CD/DVD changer (example)

:

Current scene

X

X

X

Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions.


To select the next/previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the

9 or : button until desired scene : has been reached.

X

X

X

Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate operating instructions).

Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Establish a Bluetooth ® connection to

COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:

R

Phone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.

R

Phone No Service : there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.

Accepting a call

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNING

The driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the handsfree device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Example: incoming call

X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in the

Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display.

You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu.

Rejecting or ending a call

X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu.


217

Dialing a number from the phone book

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book.

X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name.

or

X

X

To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

If only one telephone number is stored

for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

or

X

X

X

If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers.

Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial.

Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

or

X To exit the telephone book: press the

~ or % button.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory.

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory.

X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number.

X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

or

X To exit the redial memory: press the

~ or % button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssist menu, you have the following options:

R show the distance display ( Y page 217)

R activate/deactivate ESP ® ( Y page 218)

R activate/deactivate the PRE-SAFE ®

( Y page 218)

Brake

R activate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST

( Y page 218)

R activate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or

Active Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 219)

R activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or

Active Lane Keeping Assist ( Y page 219)

Showing the distance display

X

X

X

Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

Press the 9 or : button to select

Distance Display .

Press the a button.

The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display appears in the multifunction display

( Y page 175).

If the Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated.

X Activate the radar sensor system

( Y page 223).

Z

218



®

G WARNING



Activating/deactivating ESP ® vehicles ( Y page 67).

on AMG

For further information about ESP ®

( Y page 66).

, see

X Start the engine.

X

X


Press 9 or : to select ESP .

X

X

Press the a button.

The current selection is displayed.

To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.

ESP ® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP ® is not available due to a malfunction.

It may be best to deactivate ESP ® following situations:

in the


R in deep snow

R on sand or gravel

Observe the information on warning lamps

( Y page 260).

Observe the information on display messages

( Y page 229).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE

®

Brake

PRE-SAFE ® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.

X

X

X

X



PRE-SAFE Brake .

Press the a button.


To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.

When PRE-SAFE ® Brake is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated

( Y page 178).

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if

PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the j

Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead of the Ä symbol ( Y page 186).

If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors

Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated.

X Switch on the radar sensor system

( Y page 223).

For more information on PRE-SAFE ® Brake, see ( Y page 69).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION

ASSIST

X

X


Press 9 or : to select Attention

Assist .

X Press the a button.


X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the

À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on.


219

For further information about ATTENTION

ASSIST, see ( Y page 191).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist

X

X



Blind Spot Asst.

.



X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.

If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors

Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst.

Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated.

X Switch on the radar sensor system

( Y page 223).

For further information about Blind Spot

Assist, see ( Y page 195).

For further information about Active Blind

Spot Assist, see ( Y page 199).

Service menu

In the Serv.

menu, you have the following options:

R calling up display messages in message memory ( Y page 228)

R restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ( Y page 333)

R checking the tire pressure electronically

( Y page 334)

R calling up when a service is due

( Y page 302)

Settings menu

Introduction

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist

X

X

X

X



Lane Keep. Asst.

Press the a button.


Press a to confirm.

When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane

Keeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on.

For further information about Active Lane

Keeping Assist, see ( Y page 202).

In the Sett.

menu, you have the following options:

R change the instrument cluster settings

( Y page 220)

R change the light settings ( Y page 220)

R change the vehicle settings ( Y page 222)

R change the convenience settings

( Y page 223)

R restore the factory settings ( Y page 224)

Z

220



Selecting the unit of measurement for distance

The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.

You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometers.

X

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett.

menu.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

Inst. Cluster submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function.

You will see the selected setting: km or miles .

X Press the a button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to:

R the digital speedometer in the Trip menu

R odometer and the trip odometer

R trip computer

R current consumption and the range

R the navigation instructions in the Navi menu

R cruise control

R

DISTRONIC PLUS

R

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display function

You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature.

X

X

X


menu.


Inst. Cluster submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X


Permanent Display: function.

You will see the selected setting Outside

Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]

(USA)/ Speedometer [mph] (Canada).

Press the a button to save the setting.

i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph

(Canada).

Lights

Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting and switches

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the

Brightness Display/Switches: function.

X

X

X


menu.


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Brightness Display/Switches: function.

You will see the selected setting.

X Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Level 1 to

Level 5 (bright).

Press the a or % button to save the setting.

If the light switch is set to Ã, T or

L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display.

In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated.


221

Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off i This function is not available in Canada.

X

X

X


menu.


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press : or 9 to select the Day

Lights: function.

If the Day Lights: have been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red.


Further information on daytime running lamps ( Y page 111).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett.

menu.

X

X


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X


Adaptive Highbeam function.

If the Adaptive Highbeam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the

_ symbol in the upper multifunction display are shown in red.


For further information about Adaptive

Highbeam Assist, see ( Y page 116).

Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting


menu.

X

X


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X


Amb. Light +/-.

function.

You will see the selected setting.

Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level

5 (bright).


Setting the ambient lighting color


menu.

X

X


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X


Ambient Light Color function.

Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press the : or 9 button to set the color to SOLAR , NEUTRAL or POLAR .


Activating/deactivating surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off


menu.

X

X


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press : or 9 to select the

Surround Lighting function.

When the Surround Lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in the multifunction display.


Z

222


Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily:

X

X

Before leaving the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.


The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine.

If you have activated the Surround

Lighting function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark:

R

Surround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and the automatic headlamp mode is activated

( Y page 111).

R Exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up:

R Parking lamps

R

Low-beam headlamps

R Daytime running lamps

R

Side marker lamps

R Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off

If you activate the Interior Lighting

Delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20seconds after you remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.


menu.

X

X


Lights submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press : or 9 to select the Light.

Delay function.

When the Interior Lighting Delay function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction display.


Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism


menu.

X

X

Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.

Door Locks function.

When the Automatic Door Lock function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in red in the multifunction display.


If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).

For further information on the automatic locking feature, see ( Y page 81).

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.

X

X

X


menu.


Press a to confirm.


223

X

X


Acoustic Lock function.

If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up red.


Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system


menu.

X

X


Press a to confirm.

X

X


Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual): .

You will see the selected setting: On or

Off .


The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated:

R DISTRONIC PLUS ( Y page 167)

R

BAS PLUS ( Y page 65)

R PRE-SAFE ® Brake ( Y page 69)

R

Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 195)

R

Active Blind Spot Assist ( Y page 199)

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature

G WARNING

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To stop steering wheel movement, move steering wheel adjustment lever or press one of the memory position buttons.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

X

X

X


menu.


Convenience submenu.

Press a to confirm.

X Press : or 9 to select the Easy

Entry/Exit: function.

If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in red in the multifunction display.


Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ( Y page 104).

Switching the belt adjustment on/off


menu.

X

X



Press a to confirm.

X

X


Belt Adjustment function.

When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in red in the multifunction display.


For further information on belt adjustment, see ( Y page 56).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off

This function is only available on vehicles with the memory function ( Y page 107).

When you activate the Auto. Mirror

Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.

Z

224



menu.

X

X



Press a to confirm.

X

X

Press : or 9 to select the Auto.

Mirror Folding function.

If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display.


X Press the : or 9 button to select

No or Yes .

X Press a to confirm the selection.

If you have selected Yes , the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running

Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

:

To fold the exterior mirrors in or out

If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror

Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior mirrors will not fold out automatically

( Y page 105).

You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :.

Restoring the factory settings

X

X


menu.


Factory Setting submenu.


The Reset All Settings?

message appears.

:

;

=

?

A

B

Digital speedometer

Gear indicator

Upshift indicator

Engine oil temperature

Coolant temperature

ECO start/stop function status indicator

( Y page 142)

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program.

Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up.

When the engine oil temperature is below

176 ‡ (80 †) the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.


225

SETUP

You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

RACETIMER is shown.

To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

:

;

=

Drive program ( C / S / S+ / M )

ESP ® mode ( ON / OFF ) or SPORT handling mode ( SPORT )

Suspension tuning ( COMFORT / SPORT /

SPORT+ )

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP ®

(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the suspension tuning.

X

X


Press the 9 button repeatedly until

SETUP is displayed.

or

X Briefly press the AMG button on the center console ( Y page 182).

X

X

Press the = or ; button to select

Interm. Time .

Press a to confirm.

The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds.

Starting a new lap

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

G WARNING

The RACETIMER feature is only for use on roads and in conditions where high speed driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is prohibited under all circumstances. The driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits.

:

;

=

RACETIMER

Fastest lap time (best lap)

Lap

X Press a to confirm New Lap .

i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. Lap 16 can only be stopped with Finish Lap .

:

;

Lap

RACETIMER

Z

226


Stopping the RACETIMER

Overall statistics

X

X

Press the % button on the steering wheel.

Press a to confirm Yes .

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start , timing is continued.

Resetting the current lap

X Stop the RACETIMER.

X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap .

X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

:

;

=

?

A

RACETIMER overall evaluation

Total time driven

Average speed

Distance covered

Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.

X

X


Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.

You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset.

X

X

X

Reset the current lap.

Press a to confirm Reset .

Reset Race Timer?

appears in the multifunction display.

Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm.

All laps are deleted.

:

;

=

?

A

Lap

Lap time

Average lap speed

Lap length

Top speed during lap

This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the

RACETIMER.

X

X


Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown.

Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.

The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.

X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation.


227

Z

228



Introduction

General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's

Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.

Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual.

Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

R

HOLD function ( Y page 178)

R

Parking ( Y page 157)

Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.

The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory

The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages:

X

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.

menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages , for example.

Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages .


X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.


229

Safety systems


!÷

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

!÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP ® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE ® , the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.

BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE ® Brake may also have failed.

In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.

ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

Possible causes are:

R

Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

R The on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP ® is not operational, ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph

(20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

X

X

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABS, ESP ® , BAS, PRE-SAFE ® , the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.


The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !

warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.


G WARNING


Z

230



÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual





X

X

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ESP ® , BAS, PRE-SAFE ® , the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.


In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.

The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.


G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.




(20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.


X

X

Drive on carefully.



231


T!

÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP ® , BAS, PRE-

SAFE ® , the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.


In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.




X Drive on carefully.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds.

X Release the parking brake.

F

(USA only)

J

(Canada only)

Please Release

Parking Brake

$

(USA only)

J

(Canada only)

Check Brake Fluid

Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.


X

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away ( Y page 157).

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

Z

232



#

Check Brake Pad

Wear

G mbrace Inoperative

PRE-SAFE

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.


One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Important functions of PRE-SAFE ® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.


PRE-SAFE

Functions

Currently Limited

See Operator's

Manual

PRE-SAFE

Functions Limited

See Operator's

Manual

PRE-SAFE ® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

R function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

R the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.

R the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

R AMG vehicles: ESP ® is deactivated.

R the system is outside the operating temperature range.

R the on-board voltage is too low.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.

PRE-SAFE ® Brake is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X

X

X

X


Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper

( Y page 307).

Restart the engine.

AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP ® ( Y page 67).

PRE-SAFE ® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed.



233


6

SRS Malfunction

Service Required

6

Front Left

Malfunction

Service

Required or Front

Right Malfunction

Service Required

6

Rear Left

Malfunction

Service Required or Rear Right

Malfunction

Service Required


There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.

There is an increased risk of injury.


For further information about SRS, see ( Y page 39).

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING




G WARNING



SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6

Left Side Curtain

Airbag Malfunction

Service Required or Right Side

Curtain Airbag

Malfunction

Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING

The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.



Z

234



Front Passenger

Airbag Enabled

See Operator's

Manual


The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey, even though:

R a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat.

or

R the front-passenger seat is unoccupied.

The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.

G WARNING

The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally.



X

X

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away ( Y page 157).

Switch the ignition off.

X

X

Open the front-passenger door.

Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.

Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight.

The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the ^a indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

R the 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the front-passenger air bag and frontpassenger knee bag ( Y page 45).

R the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's

Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See

Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display.


235


Front Passenger

Airbag Disabled

See Operator's

Manual


X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.


For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see ( Y page 45).

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey, although:

R an adult or

R a person larger than a certain size is occupying the frontpassenger seat.

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNING

The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident.


X

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


Switch the ignition off.

Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the 45 indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

R the 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the frontpassenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag ( Y page 45).

R the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's

Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See

Z

236


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display.

X

X

Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.


For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see ( Y page 45).

Lights

i Display messages about LEDs:

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages b

Check Left

Cornering Light or

Check Right

Cornering light


The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself

( Y page 119).

or


b

Check Left Low

Beam or Check

Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.


( Y page 119).

or


b

Check Rear Left

Turn Signal or

Check Rear Right

Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

( Y page 119).

or



237

Display messages b

Check Front Left

Turn Signal or

Check Front Right

Turn Signal b

Check Left Mirror

Turn Signal or Check

Right Mirror Turn

Signal


The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.


( Y page 119).

or


The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective.


( Y page 119).

or


b

Check Center Brake

Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.


( Y page 119).

or


b

Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or

Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

X or

Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

( Y page 119).


b

Check Left High

Beam or Check Right

High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

X or

Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself

( Y page 119).


b

Check Front Left

Parking

Lamp or Check Front

Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.


( Y page 119).

or


Z

238


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b

Check Left Reverse

Lamp or Check

Right Reverse Lamp

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.


( Y page 119).

or


b

Check Front Left

Sidemarker Lamp or

Check Front Right

Sidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

X or

Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

( Y page 119).


b

Check Rear Left

Sidemarker Lamp or

Check Rear Right

Sidemarker Lamp b

Check Left Daytime

Running Light or

Check Right

Daytime Running

Light

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

X or

Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself

( Y page 119).


The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.


( Y page 119).

or


b

Active Headlamps

Inoperative b

Malfunction See

Operator's Manual b

Auto Lamp Function

Inoperative b

Switch Off Lights

The active light function is defective.


The exterior lighting is defective.


The light sensor is defective.


The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds.

X Turn the light switch to Ã.


239


Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Inoperative


Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.


Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

R the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.

R visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

X Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine


+

Check Coolant

Level See

Operator's Manual

?


The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X

X

Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so

( Y page 300).

If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the next qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Z

240



?

Coolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle Turn

Engine Off


The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X

X

X

X


Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡ (120 †).

Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X

X

Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.

If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).


241


#

4

Check Engine Oil

At Next Refueling


The battery is not being charged.



R a defective alternator

R a torn poly-V-belt

R a malfunction in the electronics

X

X

X

X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


Open the hood.

Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.

If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.


If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:


The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.


X

X

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

( Y page 299).

If necessary, add engine oil ( Y page 300).

Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Z

242



4

Check Eng.Oil Level

8

Fuel Level Low

C


AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

X

X

X

Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

( Y page 299).

If necessary, add engine oil ( Y page 300).

Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only).

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8

Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:


Driving systems


À

Attention Assist:

Take a Break!

À

Attention Assist

Inoperative


Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds.

X If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.



243


¨

Vehicle Rising

¨

Vehicle Rising

Wait Briefly

¨

STOP Car Too Low

¨

Malfunction

ë

Off

Radar Sensors

Deactivated See

Operator's Manual


Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not pull away.

The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.

AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.

X

X

X



Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.

X

X

X

X

Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h).

Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.

Listen for scraping sounds.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.

Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle.


The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h).


The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.


X Reactivate the HOLD function later ( Y page 178).

The radar sensor system is deactivated.

X Switch on the radar sensor system ( Y page 223).

Z

244



Lane Keeping

Assist Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual or Active Lane

Keeping Assist

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping

Assist

Inoperative or

Active Lane

Keeping Assist

Inoperative


Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

R the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.

R visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

R there are no lane markings for a longer period.

R the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.


Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.



X

X


Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.



245


Blind Spot Assist

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual or Active Blind

Spot Assist

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual


Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

R the sensors are dirty.


R the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range.


The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.


Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.



X

X

X


Clean the sensors ( Y page 307).

Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist

Inoperative or

Active Blind Spot

Assist Inoperative

Park Assist

Canceled

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.


The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened.

X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active.

X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP ® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later ( Y page 186).

Z

246



Park Assist

Inoperative


You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers.

Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes ( Y page 186).

X

X


Switch off and restart the engine.



PARKTRONIC is defective.


Park Assist

Finished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated ( Y page 167).

If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now

Available

DISTRONIC PLUS

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

( Y page 167).

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:


R the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.


R the system is outside the operating temperature range.

R

The on-board voltage is too low.



DISTRONIC is operational again.



X

X

X


Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper

( Y page 307).

Restart the engine.


247


DISTRONIC PLUS

Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS

Passive

DISTRONIC PLUS

- - - mph

Cruise Control

Inoperative

Cruise Control

- - - mph


DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE ® Brake may be inoperative as well.



You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.


An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

( Y page 167).

Cruise control is defective.



A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.

You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.

X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

( Y page 165).

Z

248


Tires


Check

Tire Pressure


The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.


G WARNING

With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:

R they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

R they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.

R the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.


X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X

X


If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires ( Y page 313).

Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct ( Y page 333).

Check Tire Pressure

Then Restart Run

Flat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.

X

X

Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system ( Y page 333).

Run Flat Indicator

Inoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.


Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes

The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.

X Drive on.

The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor

Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.



249


Tire Pressure

Monitor

Inoperative No

Wheel Sensors

Check

Tire Press.

Warning

Tire Malfunction


The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.

The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.

X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.

The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.


G WARNING






X

X

X

X

X

Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.



Check the tire pressure ( Y page 334).

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNING

If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:

R

A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

R

You could lose control of the vehicle.

R

Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.


X

X




Z

250



Correct

Tire Pressure

TirePress.

Sensor(s) Missing


The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

X

X

X

Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity ( Y page 334).


Restart the tire pressure monitor ( Y page 336).

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.

X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Press. Monitor

Currently

Unavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.

X Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved.

h

Tire Press.

Warning Tire

Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.


G WARNING

If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:

R

A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

R

You could lose control of the vehicle.

R

Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.


X

X

X

Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.




251

Display messages h

Tire Press. Check

Tire Pressure h

Correct Tire

Pressure


The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.

G WARNING







X

X

X

X





The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

X

X

Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity ( Y page 334).


Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine


You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D.

X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary Battery

Malfunction

Apply Brake to

Shift from 'P'

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged.


You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.

X Depress the brake pedal.

Z

252



Risk of Rolling

Away

Vehicle Not in P

Service Required

Do Not Shift Gears

Only Shift to 'P' when

Vehicle is

Stationary

N


The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D.


X

X



You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.


If transmission position D is selected:

X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

The vehicle is moving.

X

X



the trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.

M

C

The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING

The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.


X

X

X



Close the hood.

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.

_

Rear Left Backrest

Not Latched or

Rear Right

Backrest Not

Latched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.

X Push the backrest back until it engages.


253

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_

Lock Seat Backrest

Front Left or Lock

Seat Backrest

Front Right

The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds.

X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Ð

Power Steering

Malfunction See

Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.


G WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.


X

X

Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service

¥

Check Washer Fluid

Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range.

X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

X Add washer fluid ( Y page 301).

SmartKey


Â

Key Does Not

Belong to Vehicle

Â

Take Your Key from

Ignition

Â

Obtain a New Key


You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.


Z

254



Â

Replace Key Battery

Â

Don't Forget Your

Key


The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries ( Y page 77).

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder.

You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.

X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Â

Key Not Detected

(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.


If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.


X

X


Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

Â

Key Not Detected

(white display message)

Â

Key Detected in

Vehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.



X

X


Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:

X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking.

X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

255


Â

Remove 'Start'

Button and Insert

Key

Â

Close Doors to

Lock Vehicle


The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.


At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.


Warning and indicator lamps overview

L

T

K

#!

ü

Low-beam headlamps

( Y page 112)

Parking lamps ( Y page 112)

High-beam headlamps

( Y page 113)

Turn signals ( Y page 113)

Seat belts ( Y page 256)

$ (USA) Brakes ( Y page 257)

J (Canada) Brakes ( Y page 257)

!

÷

ABS ( Y page 258)

ESP ® ( Y page 260)

å

M

6

;

8

?

· h

ESP ® OFF ( Y page 260)

SPORT handling mode in

AMG vehicles ( Y page 261)

SRS ( Y page 263)

Check Engine ( Y page 264)

Reserve fuel ( Y page 264)

Coolant ( Y page 264)

Distance warning signal

( Y page 266)

Tire pressure monitor

( Y page 267)

Z

256


Safety

Seat belts

Problem

ü

After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.


The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.

X Fasten your seat belt ( Y page 55).

ü

After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.


The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.


The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.

The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).


The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than

15 mph (25 km/h).

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.


257

Safety systems

Problem

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only)

The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.


G WARNING

The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.


X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X

X



X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only)

The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.


X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X

X

X

X


Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.


Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Z

258


Problem

!

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.


ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.

BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP ® (Electronic Stability

Program), PRE-SAFE ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.


G WARNING






X

X

Drive on carefully.


If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.


259

Problem

!

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.


ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP

(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE

PRE-SAFE ®

®

Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.


R


R

The on-board voltage may be insufficient.


® ,

, EBD

G WARNING





X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).

The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:


X

X

Drive on carefully.


Z

260


Problem

!

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.


EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,

BAS PLUS, ESP ® , PRE-SAFE ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.


G WARNING





X

X


Drive on carefully.


$ (USA only)

J (Canada only)

÷å!

The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP ® and ESP ® OFF warning lamps and the yellow

ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running.

ABS and ESP ® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,

BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.


G WARNING






X

X

Drive on carefully.



261

Problem

÷

The yellow ESP ® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.


ESP ® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.

Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.

X

X

Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

X Do not deactivate ESP ® .

For exceptions, see: ( Y page 66).

å

The yellow ESP ® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ESP ® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP ® is switched off, ESP ® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.


X Reactivate ESP ® .

X

For exceptions, see: ( Y page 66).

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP ® cannot be activated:

X Drive on carefully.

X Have ESP ® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:

The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP ® stabilize the vehicle.

is unable to


X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section ( Y page 67).

Z

262


Problem

÷å

The yellow ESP ® and

ESP ® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

÷å

The yellow ESP ® and

ESP ® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.


ESP ® , BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE ® , PRE-SAFE ® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.


G WARNING






X

X

Drive on carefully.


ESP ® , BAS, PRE-SAFE ® , the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.




G WARNING






(20 km/h).

The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:

X

X


Drive on carefully.



263

Problem

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only)

The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.


You are driving with the parking brake applied.

X Release the parking brake.

The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

6

The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System).

G WARNING



X

X

Drive on carefully.

Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about SRS, see ( Y page 39).

Z

264


Engine

Problem

;

The yellow Check

Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.


There may be a malfunction, for example:

R in the engine management

R in the fuel injection system

R in the exhaust system

R in the ignition system

R in the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode.

X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

In addition, the ;

Check Engine warning lamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

X

X

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

?

The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is defective.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X

X




265

Problem

?

The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.


The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X

X

X

X


Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X

X

Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes ( Y page 300).

If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X

X

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.



X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


Z

266


Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X

X

Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes ( Y page 300).

If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem

·

The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds.


You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed.

X

X

Be prepared to brake immediately.

Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS ( Y page 167).

Further information on PRE-SAFE ® Brake ( Y page 69).


267

Tires

Problem h

USA only:

The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp

(pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit.

Canada only:


(pressure loss) is lit.


The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNING






X

X




X

X

X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires ( Y page 313).



h

USA only:


(pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNING

The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.




Z

268


Stowage areas .................................. 270

Features ............................................. 276

269

270

Stowage areas




or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.

R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.

R always place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place.

R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.

R secure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNING

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backrests.

The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.

Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.

Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load:

R when transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

Stowage space


G WARNING

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backrests.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during

R braking

R vehicle maneuvers

R an accident

Stowage areas

271

Eyeglasses compartment Glove box

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;.

X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages.

i The glove box can be ventilated

( Y page 134).

There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses in the headliner on the driver's side.

X To open: pull down eyeglasses compartment : by the handle.

Stowage compartments in the front center console

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position

2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1.

All models except AMG vehicles

X

X

To open: slide the cover forwards by handle : in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

To close: briefly press the front of handle :.

Z

272

Stowage areas

Stowage compartment under the front seats

AMG vehicles

X Briefly press trim :.

i The stowage tray can be removed.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards.

i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment under the driver's seat.

Stowage compartments in the rear center console

X To open: pull handle : up.

The armrest folds out.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a

12 V socket, a USB socket, and an AUX IN connection or Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media

Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod ® or MP3 player (see the separate COMAND

Operating Instructions).

X To open: slide covers : and ; in the direction of the arrow.

i There is a 12 V power socket in the front stowage compartment.

Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the armrests when they are folded out as you could damage them.

Stowage areas

273

! Close the cover of the stowage compartment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest.

thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.

Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left and right-hand sides of the trunk.

X To open: fold down seat armrest ;.

X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.

Stowage pockets

G WARNING

Storage bags are intended for storing lightweight items only.

Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the storage bag. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

Storage bags cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.

The stowage pockets are on the back of the driver's and front-passenger's seats.

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat


G WARNING

When expanding the cargo volume, always fold the seat backrests fully forward.

Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position.


Always use the cargo tie-down rings.

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the trunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forward

Stowage nets

G WARNING

Parcel nets are intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail, etc.

Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be i Vehicles with memory function: when you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front

Z

274

Stowage areas seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact.

X Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards.

X

X

Open the trunk.

Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :.

The corresponding rear seat backrest is released.

backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary.

X

X

Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages.

Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

i You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle interior.

X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

Folding the seat backrest back

G WARNING

Always lock the seat backrest in its upright position when the rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not in use.

Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrest.


To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo.

! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notes

Observe the following notes on securing loads:

R secure the load using the cargo tie-down rings.

R do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.

R do not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners.

R pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage areas

275

Trunk

: Cargo tie-down rings

There are six cargo tie down rings in the trunk.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment.

X To open: pull handle : up.

Bag hook

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load.

X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.

X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

! Unhook the handle before again before closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to prevent the handle flap from protruding.

Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

Roof carrier


G WARNING

Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-

Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. Otherwise, an improperly attached roof rack system or its load could become detached from the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum roof load of

220 lb (100 kg).

Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded, the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicle without the roof rack loaded.

Z

276

Features

! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them.

Attaching the roof carrier

Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Cup holder in the front-compartment center console

X Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :.

X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

All vehicles (except AMG)

:

Cup holders

Features

Cup holders


G WARNING

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.

An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

AMG vehicles

:

Cup holders

;

Cover

X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost position.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

AMG vehicles: you can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder in the direction of the

Features

277 arrow to clean it. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Cup holder in the rear-compartment center console

X To open: slide cover : forwards.

X To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove cup holder insert = upwards.

X

X

To re-install the insert: place the insert in the stowage space.

Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

You can remove the insert and the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.

X

X

X

Fold down the rear seat armrest.

To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.

Press release catch :.

Cup holder ; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back down, if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.

Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.

Bottle holder

G WARNING

Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged, or fragile bottles in the bottle holder.

In the event of an accident, the bottle holder cannot secure a bottle sufficiently. You and/ or vehicle occupants could be injured.

! Make sure that any bottles weighing more than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.

Z

278

Features

X

X

Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening.

Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.

The bottle holder is designed for bottles with a capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) up to 54 fl. oz.

(1.5 l).

The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over.

Glare from the side

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNING

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

X Fold down sun visor :.

X Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.

X Swing sun visor : to the side.

X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.

:

;

=

?

A

Mirror light

Bracket

Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

Vanity mirror

Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover

A has been folded up.

Rear window roller sunblind


G WARNING








Features

279


G WARNING

When adjusting a roller sunblind, the roller blind moves up or down. You might become trapped in the process.

In the event of danger, briefly press the button for the roller sunblind to change the roller blind's direction of movement.

the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged.

Extending/retracting the roller sunblind

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged.


X

X

To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages.

To remove the insert: grasp insert = by the notch at the side and lift it up ; and out.

X

X

To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages.

To close: briefly press cover : at the front.

The cover moves back.

X

X

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock ( Y page 139).

To extend or retract: briefly press button :.

The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that

AMG vehicles

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.

The stowage compartment opens.

X

X

To remove the insert: slide insert ; forwards in the direction of the arrow.

Remove insert ;.

Z

280

Features

X To re-install the insert: place the insert into the holder and press it in the opposite direction of the arrow until it engages.

X To close: fold down cover :.

i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: slide cover ; forwards.

X To remove the insert: pull insert : up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNING









G WARNING

Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only.

Make sure any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter.

Features

281


X

X

X

X


To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages.

Press in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

To close: briefly press cover : at the front.


12 V sockets

General notes

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock ( Y page 139).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).

Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones.

If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket under the armrest

AMG vehicles

X

X

X


To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.


Press in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

X

X

Open the stowage compartment under the armrest ( Y page 272).

Lift up the cover of socket :.

Z

282

Features

Socket in the front-compartment center console

Socket in the rear-compartment center console


X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages.

X Lift up the cover of socket ;.

X To close: briefly press cover : at the front.


X Slide cover ; forwards.

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

Socket in the trunk

AMG vehicles

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.


X Lift up the cover of socket ;.

X To close: fold down cover :.

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

mbrace


! A license agreement must exist in order to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the ï MB Info call button to register. If any of the steps mentioned is not carried out, the system may not be activated.

Features

283

If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone assistance services:

R USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

R

Canada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. USA only: you can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at

http://www.mbusa.com.

The mbrace system is available if:

R it has been activated and is operational

R the corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the

Customer Center

R a service subscription is available

R the starter battery is sufficiently charged i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if:

R

GPS reception is available

R the vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center

The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during an mbrace call, proceed as follows:

X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or

X Use the volume controller of the audio system/COMAND.

The mbrace system provides various services, e.g.:

R automatic and manual emergency call

R

Roadside Assistance call

R

MB Info call

USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under

"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following conditions occurs:

R the indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test.

R the indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.

R the indicator lamp in the ï MB-Info call button does not light up during selfdiagnosis of the system.

R the indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis:

SOS button

-

Roadside Assistance call button F

MB Info call button ï

R The mbrace Inoperative or mbrace

Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, assistance must be summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines:

R

USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

R


1-888-923-8367

Z

284

Features

Emergency call


G WARNING

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and no voice connection with the Response center has been established, then the mbrace system has not been able to initiate an emergency call

(e.g. the relevant mobile phone network is not available).

The Call Failed message is displayed in the multifunction display and must be confirmed.

Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

! A license agreement must exist in order to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the ï MB Info call button to register. If any of the steps mentioned is not carried out, the system may not be activated.

If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone assistance services:

R

USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

R


1-888-923-8367

An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered.

i You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated manually.

As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display.

The audio output is muted.

Once the connection has been made, the

Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example:

R current location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system)

R vehicle identification number

R information on serious accidents

Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center attempts to get more information on the emergency.

i If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

Making an emergency call

G WARNING

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The

Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle's approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

Features

285

X To initiate an emergency call

manually: press cover : briefly to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded.

X

X

Wait for a voice connection to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center.

After the emergency call, close cover :.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The

Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call

Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center, for example:

R current location of the vehicle

R vehicle identification number i The COMAND display shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center and the vehicle occupants.

From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance center can ascertain the nature of the problem ( Y page 289).

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-

Benz technician or organizes for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate a

Roadside Assistance call if:

R the indicator lamp for Roadside

Assistance call button : is flashing continuously

R no voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center was established

This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

X or

To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on COMAND.

Z

286

Features

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The

Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display and the COMAND system is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call

Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center, for example:

R current location of the vehicle

R vehicle identification number i The COMAND display shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center and the vehicle occupants. You can obtain information on how to operate your vehicle's systems, on the location of the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and on further products and services offered by Mercedes-Benz USA.

USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate an

MB Info call if:

R the indicator lamp in MB Info call button : is flashing continuously

R no voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center was established

This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

X or

To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on COMAND.

Call priority

When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside

Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.

The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:

R the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel

R or the corresponding COMAND button for ending a telephone call i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Features

287

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations gives you access to a data bank with over 15 million Points of

Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/ important destinations in the vicinity.

Furthermore, you can download routes with up to 20 way points.

You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered.

X

X

Select Yes with the = or ; buttons on the COMAND system.

Confirm with the 9 button on the

COMAND system.

The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

i If you select No , the address can be stored in the address book.

i The Destination Download function is available if the corresponding mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.

i You can only use the Destination

Download function if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.

Route Assistance

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS

Package and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle.

The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination.

You will then be guided live through the current route section.

Search & Send

General notes i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. You must also have an mbrace service subscription.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps ® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination address

X Go to the website http:// www.maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace

account: click on the corresponding button.

i Example:

If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then

'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:

X

In the relevant field, enter the e-mail address which you specified when activating your mbrace account.

Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Sending" can be found on the website.

Calling up destination addresses

X Switch on the ignition.

The destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system.

Z

288

Features

X

A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press

W to confirm.

The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

i If you select No , the address can be stored in the address book.

i If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: if multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

X

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

R Canada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.

Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:

R the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section

R the telephone application (e.g. iPhone ® ,

Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible.

Vehicle remote opening

You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely opened within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote opening may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely.

X Contact the following service hotlines:

R USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

Vehicle remote closing

The remote closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed remotely.

X Contact the following service hotlines:

R


Assistance center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

R Canada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors

Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display.

Features

289

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:

R the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section

R the telephone application (e.g. iPhone ® ,

Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible.

Stolen vehicle recovery service

If your vehicle has been stolen:

X Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

X This number will be forwarded to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center together with your PIN.

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center then attempts to locate the mbrace system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance center is automatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis

With the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the

Customer Assistance center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-

Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is called.

If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance center. You will see the Roadside

Assistance Connected message in the

COMAND display. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is able to be started, the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis?

message appears in the display.

X

X

X

Press Yes to confirm the message.

If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please switch on ignition.

message appears: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position.

message appears: follow the instructions of the customer service representative.

The message in the display disappears.

If you select Cancel , the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely.

The vehicle operating state check begins.

Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis activated message appears.

When the check is finished, the Sending vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer.) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center.

X Press OK to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the Customer

Assistance center is terminated.

The Vehicle Diagnosis:

Transferring data...

appears.

The vehicle data is sent to the Customer

Assistance center.

Z

290

Features

Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.

Further functions of the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis include, for example:

R transfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop.

R monthly status information E-Mail on oil level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, etc. If applicable, you will receive information on special offers in the E-Mail.

USA only: this information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle

( Y page 25).

Information on roadside assistance

( Y page 22).

Downloading routes

Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. To do this, an SD memory card must be inserted into the COMAND system. If no

SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND system before saving.

A route can be prepared and sent either by a customer service representative or via the mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can include up to 20 way points. When a route has been received by the navigation system,

'Route name' has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance?

appears on the COMAND display. The route is saved to the SD memory card.

X To start route guidance: select Yes .

An overview of the route is shown in the display.

i If you select No , the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start .

Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND. Further information can be found in the "COMAND", "Online and Internet services" and "Download destination/route" sections.

Speed alert

You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer

Assistance center. The Customer Assistance center then forwards this information to you.

You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.

The data which is sent to the Customer

Assistance center contains the following information:

R the location where the speed limit was exceeded

R the time at which the speed limit was exceeded

R the selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing

Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.

The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.

You can specify up to ten areas

Features

291 simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area.

USA only: these settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com.

Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing.

Currently inactive areas can be activated by

SMS.

Triggering the vehicle alarm

With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.

Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener


G WARNING

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current

U.S. federal safety standards.

When programming a garage door opener, park vehicle outside the garage.

Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

The HomeLink ® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems.

i Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programming the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:

R


Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

R


1-800-387-0100

R HomeLink ® hotline 1-800-355-3515

(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink ® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com.

i USA only:

This device complies with part 15 of the


1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and



FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

Z

292

Features i Canada only:

This device complies with the RSS-210

Rules of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and



IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming

Programming buttons

G WARNING

Only press the button on the integrated garage door opener if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves.

Integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror

Garage door remote control A is not part of the integrated garage door opener.

X

X

Before programming for the first time, clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener ( Y page 294).


X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener.

After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow.

i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programmed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to

20 cm).

i The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

X Press and hold button B on remote control

A until indicator lamp : lights up green.

If indicator lamp : lights up green or flashes, then programming has been successful.

X

X

Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system.

If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rearview mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programming, the garage door system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage door system.

Features

293

Synchronizing the rolling code

Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.

Observe the safety notes when performing the rolling code synchronization.


X Press the programming button of the door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under

"Programming of additional remote controls").

i Usually, you now have 30seconds to initiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button ;,

= or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then complete.

Notes on programming the remote control

Canadian radio frequency laws require a

"break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.

Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.

Proceed as follows:

R if you live in Canada

R if you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps

X

X

Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener.

After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow.

Release the button.

Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

X

X

Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.

Press button B again for two seconds.

X

X

Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green.

If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the process.

Continue with the other programming steps (see above).

Problems when programming

If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions:

R

Check the transmitter frequency of garage door drive remote control A. This can usually be found on the back of the remote control.

The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of

280to 433MHz.

R

Replace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control

A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror.

R

When programming, hold remote control

A at varying distances and angles from the button that you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and

12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances.

R

If another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the

Z

294

Features same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A.

R

Note that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control

A again before transmission ends.

R Align the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.

i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle.

Compass

Calling up the compass

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control.

Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.

X

X


Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.

To receive a correct display in rear-view mirror :, the compass must be calibrated and the magnetic field zone set.

X Briefly press button =.

Compass ; displays in which compass direction the vehicle is currently traveling:

N , NE , E , SE , S , SW , W or NW .

Clearing the memory


X

X

Press buttons ; and ?.

The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green.

Setting the compass

North America zone map

Features

295

Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following:

R calibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or highvoltage transmission lines.

R switch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster.

R close all doors and the trunk lid.


X

X

Press and hold button =( Y page 294) for approximately six seconds until the

C symbol appears in compass display ;

( Y page 294).

Drive in a full circle at approximately

3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).

When the calibration has successfully been completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ;( Y page 294).

South America zone map

X Set your location using the zone maps.

X Press and hold button =( Y page 294) for approximately three seconds.

The zone currently selected appears in compass display ;( Y page 294).

X To select the zone: press button =( Y page 294) repeatedly until the desired zone is selected.

The zone has been selected when compass display ;( Y page 294) shows the heading.

This takes a few seconds.

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING

Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormat is securely fastened.

The floormat should always be securely fastened using the fastening equipment.

Before driving off, check that the floormat is securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals.

Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement.

Z

296

Features

X

X

X

X

Slide the seat backwards.

To install: place the floormat in the footwell.

Press studs : onto retainers ;.

To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.

X Remove the floormat.


Engine compartment ........................ 298

Maintenance ...................................... 302

Care .................................................... 303

297

298

Engine compartment





Hood

Opening the hood

G WARNING

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be forced open by passing air flow.

This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and/or others.

G WARNING

Do not open the hood when the engine is overheated. You could be seriously injured.

Observe the coolant temperature gauge to determine whether the engine may be overheated. If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, move away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.

G WARNING

There is a risk of injury if the hood is open, even if the engine is not running.

Some engine components can become very hot.

To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Operator's

Manual and observe the relevant safety notes.

G WARNING

To avoid injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30seconds or may even restart after the engine has been switched off. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area.

G WARNING

The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage, it is dangerous to touch any components

(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system:

R with the engine running

R while starting the engine

R when the ignition is switched on and the engine is turned manually

G WARNING

The windshield wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion.

When the hood is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage.

Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off. Remove the SmartKey or make sure that no ignition position has been selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument panel.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.


299

X

X

Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 inches (20cm).

Check that the hood has engaged properly.

If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

X Pull release lever : on the hood.

The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood.

If you lift the hood approximately

15 inches (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled struts.

Engine oil

General notes

Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.

When checking the oil level:

R park the vehicle on a level surface.

R the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature.

R if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick

Closing the hood

G WARNING

When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.

Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and injure you and/or others.

X

X

Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube.

Wipe off oil dipstick :.

Z

300


X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again.

If the level is between MIN mark = and

MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark

= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNING

If engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot engine parts.

H Environmental note

When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center.

Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following:

R using engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system

R replacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded

R using engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise.

Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick ( Y page 299).

Further information on engine oil

( Y page 368).

Additional service products

Checking the coolant level

G WARNING

In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:

R use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the coolant is overheated.

R do not remove the pressure cap on the coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature is above 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.


301

R using a rag, slowly turn the cap approximately 1 /

2

turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.

R do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see

( Y page 369).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system/headlamp cleaning system

G WARNING

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.

X

X

X

X

X


On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the

Start/Stop button twice ( Y page 139).

Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster.

The coolant temperature must be below

158 ‡ (70 †).

Turn the SmartKey to position

0 ( Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to escape.

Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it.

If the coolant is at the level of marker bar

= in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.

If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler

X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.

X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system.

Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze ( Y page 370).

Z

302

Maintenance

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messages

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date.

Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet).

You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level ( Y page 299).

The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:

Next Service A in .. days

Service A Due

Service A Exceeded by ... days

The letter A or B , possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service.

You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:

X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.

or

X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message

X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel.

Displaying service messages


X

X


menu.

Press the 9 or : button to select the

ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with a.

The service due date appears in the multifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out.

You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements

Arduous operating conditions or increased loads on the vehicle will require some service work to be performed more often than for a vehicle in normal use. Such arduous conditions include regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops and use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces.

For example, if the vehicle is used under arduous operating conditions, have air filters,

Care

303 engine oil and oil filters changed frequently and check the wheels often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


Driving abroad

An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.

The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term.

Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Care

General notes

G WARNING

Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

Some are poisonous, others are flammable.

Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the inside.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.

Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children.


Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following:

R dry, rough or hard cloths

R abrasive cleaning agents

R solvents

R cleaning agents containing solvents

Do not scrub.

Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, you must drive particularly carefully after washing the vehicle until the brakes have dried.

G WARNING

The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC

PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash.

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:

Z

304

Care

R the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.

R the ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed).

R the windshield wiper switch is in position

0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

R

Vehicles with a SmartKey:

Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand.

R

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:

Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N:

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position

2 ( Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/

Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X

X

X

X

X

Depress and hold the brake pedal.

Shift the automatic transmission to position N.


Release the electric parking brake.

Switch off the ignition and leave the


You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand

In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays.

Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Use a soft sponge to clean.

X

X

X

Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNING

Do not use power washers with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tires. You could otherwise damage the tires and cause an accident.

! Always maintain a distance of at least

11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

Care

305

Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

R tires

R door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.

R electrical components

R battery

R connectors

R lights

R seals

R trim

R ventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used.

If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz should be used.

Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot.

X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:

R stickers

R films

R magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

X

X

Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

Use silicone remover to remove wax.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect:

R

Vigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials.

R

Frequent use of car washes.

R

Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.

wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).

Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.

These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.

Z

306

Care i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.

The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING

Before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.


Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone out. The windshield wipers could otherwise move and injure you.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows.

Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNING

Before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.


Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone out. The windshield wipers could otherwise move and injure you.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X

X

X

Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.

Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.

Care

307

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.

Mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.

Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:

R alcohol-based thinner or gasoline

R abrasive cleaning agents

R commercially-available household cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface

Z

308

Care when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.

X

X

Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

G WARNING

Always remember that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. The driver must always concentrate on the road. For your safety and the safety of others, stop the vehicle before trying to clean fogged-up windows or to clean the window in front of the

Night View Assist Plus camera.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second.

! Never clean the camera lens. When cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess :.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in front of camera ;.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING

When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result, plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an air bag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:

R stickers

R films

R scented oil bottles or similar items

You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

X

X

Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

The surface may change color temporarily.

Wait until the surface is dry again.

Care

309

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever

X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.

The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X

X

Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.

R clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

R clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Leave the seat to dry afterwards.

Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there.

R clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or

DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.

Cleaning the seat covers

! Observe the following when cleaning:

R clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡

(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X

X

Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.

Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z

310


Where will I find...? ........................... 312

Flat tire .............................................. 313

Battery (vehicle) ................................ 314

Jump-starting .................................... 317

Towing and tow-starting .................. 318

Fuses .................................................. 322

311

312

Where will I find...?




Where will I find...?

First-aid kit

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

:

;

=

Vehicle tool kit tray

Stowage well

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

X

X

Open the trunk lid.

Lift the trunk floor upwards ( Y page 275).

The vehicle tool kit contains:

R

Folding wheel chock

R Fuse allocation chart

R

Jack

R Alignment bolt

R

One pair of gloves

R Lug wrench

R

Towing eye

X Open the trunk lid.

X

X

Slide the stowage net down.

Open the stowage compartment.

X Release tensioning strap :.

X Remove first-aid kit ;.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing items.

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel

(AMG vehicles)

Vehicle tool kit

General notes

The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor.

:

;

=

?

Towing eye

One pair of gloves

Jack

Folding wheel chock

Flat tire

313

A

B

C

D

E

Alignment bolt

Sheet for faulty wheel

Tire inflation compressor

Lug wrench

Fuse allocation chart

X

X

Open the trunk lid.


Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Information on changing/mounting a wheel

( Y page 348).

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires.

Your vehicle may be equipped with:

R MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) ( Y page 313)

R an emergency spare wheel ( Y page 357)

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.

X

X

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

Apply the parking brake.

X

X

X

Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.


Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that

"normal" level is selected ( Y page 180).


X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.

The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the

Start/Stop button from the ignition lock

( Y page 139).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.

Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so.

X

X

X

Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed.

Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.

Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.

Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

G WARNING

When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.

Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle.

Stop driving in emergency mode if:

R you hear banging noises.

R the vehicle starts to shake.

R you see smoke and smell rubber.

R ESP ® is intervening constantly.

R there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.

After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor.

Z

314


The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden, and approximately

18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:

R Speed

R

Road condition

R Outside temperature

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving.

The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display.

Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h).

i When changing or replacing one or all of the tires, note the label "MOExtended".

Take note also of the size specified for the vehicle.



Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g.

removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit and damage your vehicle's electronic system. This can disrupt driving safety systems such as

ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP ®

(Electronic Stability Program).

R If ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock during braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. There is a risk of accident.

R If ESP ® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery.

Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask.

Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's

Manual.

G WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.


315

Never lean over batteries while connecting.

You might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.

G WARNING

Do not place any metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit.

Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

Take care that you do not become statically charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you also should not pull or push the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials.

Never touch the battery first. First, touch the outside body of the vehicle in order to release any possible electrostatic charges.

Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The battery could explode if touched due to electrostatic charge or due to spark formation.


Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the service intervals in the

Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that:

R you switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off.

Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged.

R you first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.

R in vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation.

In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.

The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.

Have the battery charge level checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist

Z

316

Battery (vehicle) workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to:

R set the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the separate operating instructions.

On vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically.

R reset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once ( Y page 105).

G WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment ( Y page 317).

Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

X

X

Open the hood ( Y page 298).

Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure

( Y page 317).

Charging the battery

G WARNING

Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

A battery charger unit specially adapted for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability.

Charge the battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the battery charger.

G WARNING

There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process.

Jump-starting

317

Jump-starting

G WARNING

Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.

Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.

Read all instructions before proceeding.

G WARNING

Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points:

R The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.

R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

R

Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

R

Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.

R

Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

R

If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.

R

Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Make sure that:

R the jumper leads are not damaged.

R when the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.

X

X

X

X

R the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

Apply the parking brake firmly.


Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).

Open the hood ( Y page 298).

Z

318

Towing and tow-starting

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device.

X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.

X

X

X

X

Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.

Start the engine.

Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time beginning at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.

X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.



G WARNING

If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if:

R the engine is not running.

R there is a brake system malfunction.

R there is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system.

The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will need more


319 force to steer and brake, you may have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force.

Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked.

If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.

G WARNING

The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.

This could damage the vehicle.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of

30 miles (50km). The towing speed of

30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than

30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( Y page 365).

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed.

If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.

The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed.

The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, you:

R cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock

R cannot shift the automatic transmission to position N i Deactivate the automatic locking feature

( Y page 81). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNING

The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be particularly careful when removing the rear cover.

Z

320


X Take cover ; off the opening.

X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye

X

X

Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.

Position the top of cover : in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages.

X

X

Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until it engages.

Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Example: towing eye covers

Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles)

The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers.

X

X

X

Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit ( Y page 312).

Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess.

Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the direction of the arrow.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised

! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP ® could otherwise damage the brake system.

Only possible on vehicles without

4MATIC.

X

X

X

Switch on the hazard warning lamps

( Y page 114).

Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

When leaving the vehicle, take the

SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions ( Y page 318).

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground

G WARNING

The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need much more effort to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly.


321

It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle

( Y page 318).

The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points:

X

X

X

X

X

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0.


On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the

SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button

( Y page 139).

Depress and hold the brake pedal.



X

X

X

Release the parking brake.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps

( Y page 114).

Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.

i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again.

X

X



As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

X

X

Shift the automatic transmission to position P.

Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.

In the event of damage to the electrical system

If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position

N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting ( Y page 317).

Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

Transporting the vehicle

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components.

Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes.

Tow-starting (emergency starting)

! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting" at ( Y page 317).

Z

322

Fuses

Fuses


G WARNING

Only use fuses that have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and that have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Using fuses that have not been approved or attempting to repair or bridge faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be overloaded and result in a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart.

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel

R fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side, when viewed in the direction of travel the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the trunk floor ( Y page 312).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING

Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off and that the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock before you open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the windshield wipers and the wiper rods above the cover could be set in motion. This could lead to you or others being injured by the wiper rods.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X

X

Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

Open the hood.

Before changing a fuse

X

X

Secure the vehicle against rolling away

( Y page 157).

Switch off all electrical consumers.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it ( Y page 139).

or

X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off ( Y page 139).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off.

X

X

Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

To open: remove lines ; from the guides.

X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind connection = to do this.

X Open clamp :.

X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.

X

X

X

To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover.

Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer.

Fold down cover and close clamps :.

X Secure lines ; in the guides.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X Open the trunk lid.

X

X

To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object.

Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow.

Fuses

323

Z

324


Important safety notes .................... 326

Operation ........................................... 326

Winter operation ............................... 328

Tire pressure ..................................... 329

Loading the vehicle .......................... 337

All about wheels and tires ............... 340

Changing a wheel ............................. 348

Wheel and tire combinations ........... 353

Emergency spare wheel ................... 357

325

326

Operation




Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:

R suitability

R legal stipulations

R factory recommendations

Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"

( Y page 353).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:

R on the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillar

( Y page 337)

R on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap ( Y page 155)

R under "Tire pressure" ( Y page 329)

R in the "Tire pressure" section


G WARNING

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of accident.

Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part (designation, manufacturer, model).

G WARNING

A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

R do not drive with a flat tire.

R immediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:

R pay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.

Operation

Information on driving

If the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary.

While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics.

If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.

Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.

Operation

327

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:

R cuts in the tires

R punctures

R tears in the tires

R bulges on tires

R deformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire ( Y page 327). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface.

All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary ( Y page 329).

Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel ( Y page 357).

The service life of tires depends on the following factors amongst other things:

R

Driving style

R Tire pressure

R

Distance covered

Tire tread

G WARNING

Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.

The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.

This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:

R Summer tires: â in (3 mm)

R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Z

328

Winter operation

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires

R Only mount tires and wheels of the same type and make.

R Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels.

R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance.

R

Do not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel ( Y page 357).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by

Mercedes-Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire ( Y page 313).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a

TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notes

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section ( Y page 348).

Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity significantly, and therefore traction and braking power as well.

Change the tires on your vehicle to

M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently.

Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNING

M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than

ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-weather tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP ® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.

Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.

Tire pressure

329

Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted.

Once the winter tires are mounted:

X

X

X

Check the tire pressures ( Y page 333).

Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system

( Y page 333).

Restart the tire pressure monitor

( Y page 334).

For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see ( Y page 357).

Snow chains

G WARNING

If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.


To avoid hazardous situations:

R never install snow chains to the front wheels

R always install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind:

R

Snow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations ( Y page 353).

R Only use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow.

Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.

R

Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains.

R

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP ® when pulling away with snow chains installed

( Y page 67). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force

(cutting action).

For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see ( Y page 357).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNING

Tires with tire pressures that are too low or too high are associated with the following hazards:

R they can burst, in particular if the vehicle is heavily laden or when driven at high speeds.

R the tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly, which can severely impair tire traction.

R the driving, steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired.

There is a risk of accident.

Z

330

Tire pressure

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:

R monthly, at least

R if the load changes

R before beginning a long journey

R under different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road driving


i The specifications on the sample Tire and

Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here.

The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the

Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

General notes

The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here.

Operation with the emergency spare

wheel ( Y page 357).

Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

:

Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side

( Y page 337).

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.

Tire pressure

331

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.

R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall

( Y page 342).

If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values:

R if you want to drive with an increased load and/or

R if you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure.

For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

R Check the tire for foreign objects.

R

Check whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.

This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident.

Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure can be checked using the on-board computer.

The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load.

Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

R if the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and

R if the vehicle has been driven for less than

1 mile (1.6 km).

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold

Z

332

Tire pressure tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires:

R on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

R in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

R on the yellow label on the emergency spare wheel (depending on the vehicle equipment)

Overinflated tires may:

R increase the braking distance

R have an adverse effect on handling characteristics

R wear quickly and unevenly

R have an adverse effect on ride comfort

R be more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/ or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:

R overheat, leading to tire defects

R have an adverse effect on handling characteristics

R wear quickly and unevenly

R have an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

:

Example: maximum permissible tire pressure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure

( Y page 329).

i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures


Observe the notes on tire pressure

( Y page 329).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:

R on the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillar

( Y page 337)

R on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap ( Y page 155)

Tire pressure

333

R in the "Tire pressure" section

R under "Tire pressure" ( Y page 329)

Checking tire pressures manually

To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:

X

X

X

X

Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.

Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and

Loading Information placard ( Y page 329).

If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to the recommended value.

X

X

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve.

Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.

Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Repeat these steps for the other tires.

cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system.

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.

The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if:

R snow chains are mounted to your vehicle's tires.

R road conditions are wintry.

R you are driving on sand or gravel.

R you adopt a very sporty driving style

(cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration).

R you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof).

Tire pressure loss warning system

(Canada only)


While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display.

The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.

Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure ( Y page 329).

The tire pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have:

R changed the tire pressure

R changed the wheels or tires

R mounted new wheels or tires

X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions.

X

X

The recommended tire pressures can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.

Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures ( Y page 329).

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 ( Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

Z

334

Tire pressure

X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv.

menu.

X

X


Tire Pressure .

Press the a button.

The Run Flat Indicator Active

Press OK to Restart message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

X

X

X

Press the a button.

The Tire Pressure Now OK?

message appears in the multifunction display.


Yes .

Press the a button.

The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

X Press the % button.

or

X When the Tire Pressure Now OK?

message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel .


The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor


G WARNING

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

USA only:

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after

Tire pressure

335 replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation

( Y page 329). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires ( Y page 336). The current pressures are saved as new reference values.

As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly.

The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure

( Y page 329).

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.

If a tire pressure monitor system is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors installed that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires.

The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the correct sensors are installed on all wheels.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or pressure loss (Canada). Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:

R if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.

R

USA only: if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.

USA only: if there is a malfunction with the tire pressure monitor it can take more than ten minutes until the malfunction is shown by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then lighting up continuously. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.

The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.

The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle.

i USA only:

This device complies with part 15 of the





Z

336

Tire pressure i Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of





Checking tire pressure electronically

X

X

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 ( Y page 139) in the ignition lock.


menu.

X

X


Tire Pressure .

Press button a.

The current tire pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than

20 minutes the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message is shown.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure monitor automatically recognizes new wheels or new sensors. If a clear allocation of the tire pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor

Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning messages

If the tire pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tire pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Each tire that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted in the pressure display.

X If the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, check the tire pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here.

The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.

X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading

Information placard on the driver's side

B-pillar ( Y page 329).

Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure

Loading the vehicle

337

X

X

X

X

X

X table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

( Y page 329).

Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.




menu.


Tire Pressure .

Press the a button.

The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for each tire or the

Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message.

Press the : button.

The multifunction display shows the Use

Current Pressure Values as New

Reference Values message.

If you wish to confirm the restart:


The Tire Pressure Monitor

Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.

After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

X Press the % button.

The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.

Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load.

(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The

Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires installed at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the

B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.


Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNING

Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the

: B-pillar, driver's side

Z

338


Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and

Loading Information placard.

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading

Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and

Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor

Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

X

X

Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard.

Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

X

X

Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example: at a sum “XXX” of

1400 lbs and five occupants each weighing

150 lbs, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 -

750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to


339

Example: steps 1 to 3

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs

(680 kg). This is for illustration purposes

only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's

Tire and Loading Information placard

( Y page 337).

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Exampl e 3

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Combin ed maximu m weight of occupa nts and cargo

(data from the Tire and

Loading

Informa tion placard)

Exampl e 1

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Exampl e 2

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Step 2

Gross weight of all occupa nts

Exampl e 1

5 Number

of people in the vehicle

(driver and occupa nts)

Distribu tion of the occupa nts

Weight of the occupa nts

Front: 2

Rear: 3

Exampl e 2

3

Front: 1

Rear: 2

Exampl e 3

1

Front: 1

Occupan t 1:

150 lbs

(68 kg)

Occupan t 2:

180 lbs

(82 kg)

Occupan t 3:

160 lbs

(73 kg)

Occupan t 4:

140 lbs

(63 kg)

Occupan t 5:

120 lbs

(54 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

Occupan t 1:

200 lbs

(91 kg)

Occupan t 2:

190 lbs

(86 kg)

Occupan t 3:

150 lbs

(68 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Occupan t 1:

150 lbs

(68 kg)

150 lbs

(68 kg)

Z

340

All about wheels and tires

Step 3

Permiss ible load

(maxim um gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and

Loading

Informa tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupa nts)

Exampl e 1

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Ò750 lbs

(340 kg)

=

750 lbs

(340 kg)

Exampl e 2

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Ò540 lbs

(245 kg)

=

960 lbs

(435 kg)

Exampl e 3

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Ò150 lbs

(68 kg) =

1350 lbs

(612 kg)

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle

(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.


Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading

Standards

Vehicle identification plate

Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle

( Y page 337).

Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are

U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data.

Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to

Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North

America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.

Where applicable, the tire grading information can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width.

Example:

R

Treadwear grade: 200

R

Traction grade: AA

R

Temperature grade: A


341

All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.


Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified

U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth ( Y page 327). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires.

The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving.

Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) ( Y page 328).

Temperature

G WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Z

342


Tire labeling

Overview

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

:

;

=

?

A

B

C

D

E

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard

( Y page 346)

DOT, Tire Identification Number

( Y page 345)

Maximum tire load ( Y page 344)

Maximum tire pressure ( Y page 332)

Manufacturer

Tire material ( Y page 345)

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed index ( Y page 342)

Load index ( Y page 344)

Tire name

The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G WARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.

There is a risk of accident.

:

;

=

?

A

B

Tire width

Nominal aspect ratio in %

Tire code

Rim diameter

Load bearing index

Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description.

If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards.

If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.

manufacturing standards.

If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S.

manufacturing standards.

If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency.

Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters.

Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect


343 ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height.

Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.

"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have a “ZR” in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

( Y page 337).

Example:

The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the tire can carry. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see

( Y page 344).

For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" ( Y page 344).

Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.

Summer tires

Index

Q

R

Speed rating up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

T

H

Index

S

V

W

Y

ZR...Y

Speed rating up to 112 mph (180 km/h) up to 118mph (190 km/h) up to 130mph (210 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h) up to 168 mph (270 km/h) up to 186mph (300 km/h) up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have a “ZR” in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

The service specification is made up of load-bearing index A and speed rating

B.

R

If the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed.

If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification.

Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification.

The letter "Y" represents the speed rating and the maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300km/h).

R

Every tire that has a maximum speed of more than 186 mph (300 km/h) must have a "ZR" in the size description and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example:

275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.

Z

344


All-weather tires and winter tires

Index

Q M+S 3

Speed rating up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S 3 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H M+S 3 up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V M+S 3 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Load index

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires.

In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber

Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the

Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds:

R all vehicles (except AMG vehicles):

130 mph (210 km/h)

R

AMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)

R

AMG vehicles with Performance Package:

186 mph (300 km/h)

R

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits.

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section ( Y page 353).

Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

In addition to the load bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed index B on the sidewall of the tire ( Y page 342).

R

If no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire

R

XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire

R

Light Load: represents a light load tire

R

C, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

3 Or M+Si for winter tires.


345

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

( Y page 337).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of every tire produced.

Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture

A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture.

For example, a tire that is marked with

"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in

2008.


Tire characteristics

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.

The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols.

For further information about retreaded tires, see ( Y page 326).

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used

Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar

Metric unit for tire pressure.

14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and

Z

346


100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of

1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the United States Department of

Transportation.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by

68 kilograms (150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.

government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressure

The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment

This is the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Speed rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The maximum weight is the sum of:

R the curb weight of the vehicle

R the weight of the accessories

R the load limit

R the weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals

(kPa) to 1 bar.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.


347

Curb weight

The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating

The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio

Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure

This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal

(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure

The tires are cold:

R if the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and

R if the vehicle has been driven for less than

1 mile (1.6 km).

Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

Weight of optional extras

The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).

These optional extras, such as highperformance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index

The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

Traction

Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in

(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Z

348

Changing a wheel

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Total load limit

Rated cargo and luggage load plus

68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.


Flat tire

You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown assistance" section ( Y page 313).

Instructions for driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire are also provided there.

The "Breakdown assistance" section

( Y page 313) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Instructions for driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire are also provided there.

Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section

( Y page 349).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions.

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center.

If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, the tires should then be replaced every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to

10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires this. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation.

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor.

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions.

The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.

Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Direction of rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is maintained.

An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels

Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components.

Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.


349

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

X Park the vehicle on firm, non-slippery and level ground.

X

X

X

X

X

X

Apply the parking brake.

Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.


Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that

"normal" level is selected ( Y page 180).


Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.

The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X

X

X

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the

Start/Stop button from the ignition lock

( Y page 139).

If included in the vehicle equipment, take the tire-change tool kit out of the vehicle.

Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit

( Y page 312).

The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.

X Fold both plates upwards :.

X Fold out lower plate ;.

X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =.

Securing the vehicle on level ground

X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Z

350


Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.


Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

The following must be observed when raising the vehicle:

R to raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

R the jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.

R avoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.

R before raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised.

R the jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used.

On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.

R do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height.

R the maximum clearance between the underside of the tire and the ground must be 1.2 in (3 cm).

R never place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle.

R never lie under the raised vehicle.

R never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.

R never open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised.

R make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.


351

Removing a wheel

! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you.

Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

X

X

X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

Remove the wheel.

Example

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.

X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING

Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

Z

352


G WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section ( Y page 348).

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake

discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it.

Therefore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X

X

X

Unscrew the alignment bolt.

Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.

Vehicles with a collapsible spare

wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel

( Y page 359).

Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.

Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

! Vehicles with a collapsible spare

wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.

Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with emergency spare wheel)

X

X

X

Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

Tightening wheel bolts (example: vehicle with emergency spare wheel)

X

X

Turn the crank of the jack counterclockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

Place the jack to one side.

X

X

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

Turn the jack back to its initial position.

Wheel and tire combinations

353

X

X

Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again.

Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.

Observe the recommended tire pressure

( Y page 329).

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors.


General notes

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP ® , and are marked as follows:

R

MO = Mercedes-Benz Original

R

MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)

R

MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.

Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables:

R BA: both axles

R

FA: front axle

R RA: rear axle

The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found:

R on the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side

R in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions

( Y page 329).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with:

R tires of the same size on a given axle (left/ right)

R the same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)

Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can find information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available

Z

354

Wheel and tire combinations at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras.

If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The sizes of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory.

The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.


355

Tires

CLS 550 BlueEFFICIENCY

Summer tires

R18

Tires

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended 4

RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended 4, 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R19

Tires

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL

RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2


RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2


All-weather tires

R18

Tires

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S

RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2


Winter tires

R18

Tires

BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V

M+SiMOExtended 4

Alloy wheels

BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


4

5

MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Z

356


CLS 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

Summer tires

R18

Tires

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended 4

RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended 4, 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2


R19

Tires

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL

RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2


RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2


All-weather tires

R18

Tires

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S

RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2


Winter tires

R18

Tires

BA: 255/40 R19 99 V XL M+Si

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V

M+SiMOExtended 4

Alloy wheels

BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2


4

5

MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".


357

CLS 63 AMG

Summer tires

R19

Tires

VA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL

RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2


RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2


Winter tires

R19

Tires

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si

RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si

RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si 5

Alloy wheels

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2


RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2


FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2


RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2




G WARNING

The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ.

Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics.


To avoid hazardous situations:

R adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

R never install more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size.

R only use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly.

R do not switch ESP ® off.

R have a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.

5 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Z

358


General notes

You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary ( Y page 329). The applicable value is found on the wheel or under "Technical data" ( Y page 361).

An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation.

Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel.

Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system/the tire pressure monitor when the damaged wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel/ collapsible spare wheel

Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor.

X

X


Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise and remove together with vehicle tool kit tray :.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =.

Removing the collapsible spare wheel

(AMG vehicles)

The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor.

X

X

X


Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift it up.

Remove collapsible spare wheel ;.


359

For further information on changing and mounting a wheel, see ( Y page 349).

Stowing a used collapsible spare wheel

! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle.

Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwise install into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-

Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.

X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air.

i Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes.

X

X

X

Screw the valve insert back into the valve.

Screw the valve cap back on.

Remove the protective sheet from the vehicle tool kit and pull it over the collapsible spare wheel.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the trunk.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel

! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.

The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.

X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described ( Y page 348).

The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated.

X

X

X

Pull connector ? and the air hose out of the housing.

Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel.

Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the valve.

X

X

X

X

Make sure on/off switch A of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.

Insert connector ? into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.

Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter

( Y page 280). Observe the notes on sockets ( Y page 281).


Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation compressor to I.

The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge =.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.

X

The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0.

The tire inflation compressor is switched off.

Z

360


X

X


If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tire pressure has been reached.

X

X

X

Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve.

Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible spare wheel valve again.

Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.


361

Technical data

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires

T 155/60 R18 107 M

Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

AMG vehicles

Collapsible spare wheel

Tires

175/50 – 19 97 P

Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

Alloy wheels

4.5 B x 18 H2


Alloy wheels

6.5 B x 19 H2


Z

362


Information regarding technical

data .................................................... 364

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 364

Warranty ............................................ 364

Identification plates ......................... 365

Service products and filling capaci-

ties ..................................................... 366

Vehicle data ...................................... 371

363

364

Warranty




Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

G WARNING

Driving safety may be impaired if nonapproved parts, tires and wheels or safetyrelevant accessories are used.

This could lead to malfunctions in safetyrelevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle.


Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning

Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

R doors

R door pillars

R door sills

R seats

R cockpit

R instrument cluster

R center console

Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes-

Benz parts should therefore be used.

More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for

Mercedes-Benz models.

All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( Y page 365) and the engine number ( Y page 366) when ordering genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts.

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and

Warranty Information booklet.

Identification plates

365

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions:

R

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

R Emission Systems Warranty

R

Emission Performance Warranty

R California, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Rhode Island and Vermont Emission

Control System Warranty

R State warranty enforcement laws (Lemon

Laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and

Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and Warranty

Information booklet, contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

; VIN

= Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate.

VIN

X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Z

366

Service products and filling capacities

X

X

Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position.

Fold floor covering : upwards.

You will see VIN ;.

The VIN can also be found in the following locations:

R on the lower edge of windshield

( Y page 366)

R on the vehicle identification plate

( Y page 365)

Engine number

:

;

=

Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards

Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)

VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)



G WARNING

Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger persons or the environment.

Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.

For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing.

If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately.


Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:

R Fuels

R

Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

R Coolant

R

Brake fluid

R Windshield washer fluid

R

Climate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers:

R

MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

R MB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.

MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel


G WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.

It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.


367

Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline.

Turn off the engine before refueling.

Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact.

Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health.

Tank capacity

Model

All models

Model

All models (except

CLS 63 AMG)

CLS 63 AMG

Total capacity

21.1 US gal

(80.0 l)

Of which reserve

Approx.

2.4 US gal

(9.0 l)

Approx.

3.7 US gal

(14.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and engine.

! You should only refuel with unleaded premium-grade gasoline as this avoids damaging the catalytic converter.

If engine running problems are apparent, have the cause checked immediately and repaired. Excess unburned fuel can otherwise enter the catalytic converter, leading to overheating and possibly causing a fire.

! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premiumgrade unleaded gasoline may be used.

If there is no premium-grade unleaded gasoline available and regular unleaded gasoline must be used, please observe the following precautions:

R only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.

R do not drive at the maximum speed.

R avoid sudden acceleration.

R if the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.

two passengers without luggage, do not allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.

R if the vehicle is fully loaded or is being operated in mountainous terrain, do not depress the accelerator pedal further than Ô of the pedal travel.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.

Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline with additives can be used.

The concentration of additives in the fuel, however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:

R

Ethanol

R

TAME

R

ETBE

R

IPA

R

TBA

For MTBE, the concentration should not exceed 15%.

The concentration of methanol in gasoline, including other additives, must not exceed

3%.

Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.

Z

368


All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel requirements, e.g.:

R knock resistance

R boiling point

R vapor pressure

You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com

(USA only).

Information on refueling ( Y page 155).

Additives

! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do not use fuel additives that are not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Damage to or malfunctions of the fuel system may otherwise occur.

One of the main problems of poor fuel quality is the forming of deposits that are created during the gasoline combustion process.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.

If you use fuels without these additives over a longer period of time, carbon deposits may build up. These deposits form at the inlet valves and in the combustion chamber in particular.

This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:

R longer engine warm-up phase

R uneven idle

R engine noise

R misfiring

R loss of power

Carbon deposits may form if the availability of gasoline with relevant additives is insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,

Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles; see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

For a list of approved products, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label.

Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This causes unnecessary costs and could damage the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change.

Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.

For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Model

CLS 550

BlueEFFICIENCY

CLS 550 4MATIC

BlueEFFICIENCY

CLS 63 AMG

Engine model

278

157

MB

Approval

229.5

229.5


369

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.

carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Filling capacities

The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model


CLS 63 AMG)

CLS 63 AMG

Additives

Capacity

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

With external oil cooler:

9.0 US qt(8.5 l)

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Brake fluid

G WARNING

Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point.

If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency.

You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance

Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.

Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin.

Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you

Coolant


G WARNING

Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling antifreeze.

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot engine parts.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Z

370


Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for

Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the

Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail.

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks:

R corrosion protection

R antifreeze protection

R raising the boiling point

If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately

266 ‡ (130 †).

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:

R be at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).

R not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for

Service Products 310.1.

The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.


Model

All models except

AMG vehicles

CLS 63 AMG

Capacity

Approx. 16.4 US qt

(15.5 l)

Approx. 11.5 US qt

(10.9 l) i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze.

Windshield/headlamp cleaning system


G WARNING

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or

MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

At temperatures above freezing:

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.

MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

Vehicle data

371

At temperatures below freezing:

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.

MB WinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature.

R

Down to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit with 2 parts water.

R

Down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit with 1 part water.

R

Down to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB

WinterFit with 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB

SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.


Model

All models

Capacity

6.3 US qt (6.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notes

Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

R the heights specified may vary as a result of:

-

Tires

Load

-

Condition of the suspension

Optional equipment

R the vehicle length specified includes the front license plate adapter.

Dimensions and weights

Model


AMG vehicles)

CLS 63 AMG

:Opening height

69.8 in

(1772 mm)

70.0 in

(1779 mm)

All models

Vehicle length

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

Vehicle height

194.6 in (4942 mm)

81.7 in (2075 mm)

55.3 in (1404 mm)

Wheelbase

Turning radius

113.1 in (2874 mm)

37.0 ft (11.27 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

CLS 63 AMG

Vehicle length

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

Vehicle height

Wheelbase

196.7 in (4996 mm)

81.7 in (2075 mm)

55.6 in (1411 mm)

113.1 in (2874 mm)

Z

372

Vehicle data

CLS 63 AMG

Turning radius 37.1 ft (11.30 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

Publication details

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Daimler AG.

As at 08.11.2011

É2185841081TËÍ

2185841081

Order no. 6515 1475 13 Part no. 218 584 10 81 Edition A 2013

Mercedes Benz 2013 CLS Coupe Operator's Manual

Assistant Bot

Operator's Manual

É2185841081TËÍ

Vehicle equipment

General notes

Service and literature

Information for customers in

California

Maintenance

Roadside Assistance

Change of address or change of ownership

Important safety notes

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves

Diagnostics connection

Qualified specialist workshop

Problems with your vehicle

Reporting safety defects

Limited Warranty

Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle

Registered trademarks

FreeType

Gnu compiler

Displays

Warning and indicator lamps

Center console, upper section

Center console, lower section

Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

Important safety notes

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Introduction

SRS warning lamp

Safety guidelines for seat belts,

Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags

Air bags

Important safety notes

Front air bags

Knee bags

Side impact air bags

Pelvis air bags

Window curtain air bags

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Method of operation

System self-test

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-

PRO luxury head restraints

Important safety notes

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

PRE-SAFE

system

Seat belts

Important safety notes

Correct use of the seat belts

Fastening seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

Belt height adjustment

Releasing seat belts

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger

Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt force limiters

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

Special seat belt retractor

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear

Top Tether

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

Override feature for the rear side windows

Driving safety systems overview

Important safety notes

Braking

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notes

BAS (Brake Assist System)

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)